JP6697197B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention is a display means having a plurality of variable display rows for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, a start operation means for a player to perform variable display of all the variable display rows, and a player Stop operation means for performing an operation for stopping the variable display of each variable display row, and announcing that it is in a special game permissible state that allows a special game that allows an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means to be specified. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that includes a notification lamp and control means for controlling the progress of a game and that can set a bet number and play a game.

  Conventionally, as a slot machine that is a spinning-type gaming machine, it is possible to specify the advantageous operation mode of the left / middle / right stop switch that allows the player to perform an operation to stop the rotation of each of the left / middle / right reels. It is equipped with a notification lamp (advantageous section lamp) for informing that it is in a special game permissible state (advantageous section) that allows a special game to be performed, and the total number of games or the number of games in the advantageous section (advantageous section game), medal The total number of payouts and the number of bonus payouts are totaled, and the advantageous section ratio (ratio of the number of advantageous zone games to the total number of games) and the accessory ratio (ratio of the bonus payouts to the number of payouts) There has been proposed a method of determining whether or not fraudulence is performed based on a section ratio, a character ratio, etc. (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent No. 6112524 (for example, paragraph 0393-0425)

  By the way, equipped with advantageous zone lamp, total number of games, number of advantageous zone games, total payout number of medals, number of handouts, etc. are totaled to calculate advantageous zone ratio, role ratio, etc. In the slot machine that determines whether fraud or the like has been performed based on the ratio, etc., the applicant of the present patent application can accurately perform the counting by performing the counting after all reels are stopped and before payout of medals. Discovering what can be done, an undisclosed Japanese Patent Application No. 2016-150020 proposes a slot machine for counting up before payout of medals. In this slot machine, the data capacity is reduced by determining whether or not the game is a game in the advantageous section depending on whether or not the advantageous section lamp is lit, and totaling the number of advantageous section games.

  However, it has been found that there is a new problem in counting the number of advantageous zone games using the advantageous zone lamp. For example, if the advantageous zone lamp is lit immediately after the game starts, the decision to shift from the special game non-permissible state where the special game is not permitted to the special game permitted state before all reels are stopped (the winning of the transition to the advantageous zone) is the game. Basically, it is preferable to stop after all reels are stopped because it will be known to the person.

  However, in order to provide a variety of effects, it is possible to stop the advantageous section lamp before stopping all reels in a predetermined case. As an example of this, with the notification effect different from the advantageous section lamp before stopping all reels, if the notification effect indicates winning of the transition to the advantageous section, the advantageous section before stopping all reels together with the notification effect It is preferable to turn on the lamp.

  In this case, in the aggregation of the number of advantageous zone games using the advantageous zone lamp that is performed after all reels are stopped and after the medal has been paid out, the advantageous zone lamp lights up at the time of aggregation in the winning game of transition to the advantageous zone. Therefore, there is a problem in that the game won in the transition to the advantageous section is counted as a game in the advantageous section although it is not a game in the advantageous section.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and the special game permissible state is set regardless of the setting timing of the lighting control data used to control the turning on and off of the notification lamp for notifying that the special game is in the special game permissive state. The purpose is to be able to accurately count the number of games in.

In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, a display means having a plurality of variable display rows for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols according to the present invention, and a player performing an operation for starting variable display of all the variable display rows An operating means, a stop operating means for the player to perform an operation for stopping the variable display of each of the variable display rows, and a special game that allows a special game that allows an advantageous operation mode of the stop operating means to be specified In a gaming machine that is provided with a notification lamp for notifying that it is in an allowable state and a control means for controlling the progress of a game, and is capable of setting a bet number and playing a game, the control means is a game being executed. Is in a special game non-permissible state in which the special game is not permitted, a lottery process for determining whether or not to win a plurality of winning combination groups including a plurality of specific winning groups is performed. and a specific role group and the second specific combination group, when the game being executed is the special game nonpermissive conditions, whether the transition to the special gaming permissive in response to the winning of the plurality of specific role groups Perform a determination process to determine, and when it is determined to shift to the special game allowable state, control the game state of the gaming machine so that the game in the special game permitted state is performed from the next game, On the condition that the transition from the special game non-permissible state to the special game permissible state is determined , the notification lamp is turned on and off at a lighting setting process timing according to the specific winning group that triggered the determination process . The lighting control data used for control is set to the content indicating the lighting of the notification lamp corresponding to the special game permissive state, and the condition for ending the special game permissible state is satisfied , at the turn-off setting processing timing, When the lighting control data is set to the content indicating that the notification lamp corresponding to the special game non-permissible state is turned off, and the count flag indicating whether to count as a game in the special game permissible state indicates counting. , Count the game as a game in the special game permissive state, and if the count flag indicates not to count, do not count the game as a game in the special game permissive state, perform counting processing, The count flag is set to a content indicating counting when the next game is a game in the special game permissive state, and set to content indicating not counting when the next game is not a game in the special game permissive state. And the lighting setting process timing corresponding to the first specific winning group is a timing before the counting process, The lighting process of the notification lamp is performed at a timing before the counting process according to the lighting setting process timing, and the lighting setting process timing according to the second specific combination group is a timing after the counting process. , lighting process of the indicator lamp at the timing after the count processing in accordance with the lighting setting processing timing is performed, the processing of setting the counting flag, regardless of the timing of setting the lighting control data in the game the Yes counting later processing, and, even after all of the lighting setting processing timing and the off setting process timing in the game, have elapsed, until it is possible to bet number setting for performing the following game There line between the process of setting of the counting flag, when the lighting control data which is set by the processing time is the content on the lighting of the notification lamp, the content indicating the counting said counting flag If the content is set and the content indicates that the notification lamp is turned off, the content is set to the content indicating that the counting flag is not counted .

According to this arrangement, provided separately from the counting flag and the lighting control data, the processing of setting the counting flag, regardless of the timing of setting the lighting control data, to be after the counting process, and, all the lights in the game It is performed after the setting processing timing and the turn-off setting processing timing have elapsed and before the bet number setting for the next game can be set. Therefore, in counting the number of games in the special game permissive state using the counting flag, the game for which the transition from the special game non-permissible state to the special game permissible state is determined is counted as the game in the special game permissive state. It is possible to accurately count the number of games in the special game permissive state.

  Further, the process of setting the counting flag may be performed by setting the lighting control data set at the time of processing as the counting flag.

  With this configuration, by using the lighting control data for setting the counting flag, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data storage capacity for the processing of setting the counting flag.

  Further, when the lighting control data is set to the content indicating the lighting of the notification lamp before the variable display of all the variable display rows is stopped, the special game non-operation is performed before the variable display of all the variable display rows is stopped. It may be possible to perform a decision effect indicating that the transition from the permissible state to the special game permissive state has been determined.

  According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from distrusting the decision effect due to the fact that the notification lamp is not turned on although the decision effect is being performed.

FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a rotating-type gaming machine (slot machine) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of the reel of the spinning drum type game machine (slot machine) of FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the spinning drum type gaming machine (slot machine) of FIG. 1. It is an external view which shows the arrangement | positioning state of the main control board of FIG. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of the main control board of FIG. 4. FIG. 5 is a schematic perspective view of a part of the main control board of FIG. 4. It is a functional block diagram which shows the function of the main control board and sub-control board of FIG. It is a diagram showing the relationship between the winning combination and the reel symbol of the first embodiment, and the number of paid-out medals. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a winning combination lottery result of 1st Embodiment, and a command. It is explanatory drawing explaining the memory content of the game information storage means of FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the relationship between the 7-segment display of 1st Embodiment, and the display data of 1 byte (8 bits). It is explanatory drawing of the display method of the ratio indicator in 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the display method of the ratio indicator in 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the display method of the ratio indicator in 1st Embodiment, (a) is a ratio indicator's tens place, tens place, 1st place of each dot lighting and abnormal state of game inspection information. It is a figure which shows a relationship, (b) is a figure which shows the specific example of the display content of the ratio indicator according to a game situation. It is explanatory drawing of the display method of the ratio indicator in 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the display method regarding the error of the payout indicator in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows power-on processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the RWM backup defect determination process (step S3) of FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a power-on initialization process (step S4) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the sensor error determination process (step S12) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process (step S7) of FIG. The error process of FIG. 17 (step S9), the error process of FIG. 24 (step S233), the error process of FIG. 25 (step S254), the error process of FIG. 31 (step S411), and the error process of FIG. 32 (step S441). It is a flowchart shown. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of a 1st embodiment. 24 is a flowchart showing an overflow error determination process performed in the main process, which is not shown in the main process of FIG. 23. 24 is a flowchart showing a reel error determination process (step S211) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game information totaling process (step S214) of FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the 400 update processing (steps S271, S273, S276) of FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the number-of-games update process (steps S278 and S280) of FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the 6000 update process (steps S285, S286, S287) of FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a cumulative update process (steps S289, S290, S291) of FIG. 26. It is a flowchart which shows the medal payout process (step S215) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of 1st Embodiment. 33 is a flowchart showing the power interruption process (step S434) of FIG. 32. 33 is a flowchart showing an external signal output process (step S446) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption processing for outside use areas (step S437) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the selector sensor monitoring process (step S531) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the selector sensor monitoring process (step S531) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the selector sensor monitoring process (step S531) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the payout sensor monitoring process (step S532) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the payout sensor monitoring process (step S532) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the door monitoring process (step S533) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the ratio display related timer update process (step S534) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows each ratio calculation (step S535) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the ratio calculation process (step S674) of FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the 100-fold processing (step S702) of FIG. 44. 45 is a flowchart showing the shift processing (steps S708 and S709) of FIG. 44. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process (step S711) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows each ratio display setting (step S536) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the ratio display data acquisition (step S773) of FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the display data acquisition process (steps S809 and S810) of FIG. 49. It is a flowchart which shows the sub error notification process of 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline | summary of the ratio calculation process performed by the calculating means of FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline | summary of the ratio calculation process performed by the calculating means of FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline | summary of the ratio calculation process performed by the calculating means of FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline | summary of the ratio calculation process performed by the calculating means of FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline | summary of the ratio calculation process performed by the calculating means of FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline | summary of the ratio calculation process performed by the calculating means of FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline | summary of the ratio calculation process performed by the calculating means of FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline | summary of the ratio calculation process performed by the calculating means of FIG. It is a timing chart for explaining the display of the ratio display, the display of the payout display, and the state of the main CPU according to the first embodiment. It is a timing chart for explaining the display of the ratio display, the display of the payout display, and the other states of the main CPU according to the first embodiment. 6 is a timing chart for explaining still another relationship between the display of the ratio display, the display of the payout display, and the state of the main CPU according to the first embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the display method of the ratio indicator in the modification of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 6 is a schematic view of a cross section taken along the line AA of the main control board in FIG. 5 and a comparative example between the conventional example and the first embodiment when an incorrect member is inserted. FIG. 6 is a more detailed schematic diagram of the main control board of FIG. 5. FIG. 67 is a schematic view of the wiring of the main control board of FIG. 65 and a comparative example of the conventional example when an illegal IC is mounted and the wiring of the main control board of the first embodiment. FIG. 66 is a schematic view of a modified example of the wiring of the main control board of FIG. FIG. 66 is a schematic diagram of a modified example of the wiring of the main control board in FIG. 65 and a comparative example of the conventional example when an unauthorized IC is mounted and the wiring of the main control board in the modified example of the first embodiment. It is a schematic perspective view of a part of main control board of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic perspective view of a part of main control board of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic perspective view of a part of main control board of 4th Embodiment. It is the bottom view which looked at the main control board of a 5th embodiment from the back side. It is explanatory drawing explaining the memory content of the game information storage means of FIG. 7 in the ball game machine (pachinko game machine) which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the display method of the ratio indicator in 6th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
A first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a spinning-type gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine) which is a gaming machine will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 1 to 68.

(Constitution)
The outline of the configuration of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the front opening of the housing 3 is openably and closably closed by the front door 5, and the operation plate 7 is disposed at a position substantially at the center height of the front door 5. A front plate 9 is disposed above the. The front plate 9 is provided with a horizontally long rectangular display window 11, and inside the display window 11, as shown in FIG. 4, a rotating reel for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols in a predetermined order is formed. Left, center and right reels 13L, 13M and 13R are arranged. The left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R form a symbol display means having a plurality of variable display rows for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R Each forms one variable display column.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R include, for example, “7”, “BAR”, “Bell”, “Cherry”, “R1”, and “R2”. A total of 21 symbols of a plurality of types are provided in a predetermined arrangement. In addition, in FIG. 2, only the symbols of the reels necessary for the description of the present embodiment are shown in order to simplify the description.

  Further, each of the symbols on the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is sequentially assigned a frame number from 0 to 20, and, for example, the symbols from 0 to 20 are printed. A reel tape is attached to the peripheral surface of the reel to form left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, 13R, respectively. When the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are rotated, a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed on the display window 11 in the predetermined order of the frame numbers 20, 19, ..., 0, 20 ,. It is variably displayed.

  Then, when the rotation of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R is stopped, a total of 9 symbols can be seen from the display window 11 for each of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R. Specifically, three reels, one on the upper, one on the middle, and one on the lower, are displayed for each reel, and a total of nine reels are displayed on the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R through the display window 11. That is, when all of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, 13R are stopped, a total of 9 symbols arranged in 3 columns and 3 rows will be stopped and displayed in the display window 11, and the upper and middle rows will be displayed. And one line in the middle row of the horizontal three rows and the diagonal two rows in the lower row becomes the winning line described later, and if the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, 13R are stopped in the state where the symbols of the winning combination are aligned on the winning line. It will be a prize.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 3, the left, middle, and right reel motors 13L, 13M, 13R are respectively connected to the left, middle, right reel motors 14L, 14M, 14R, each of which is composed of a stepping motor. The middle and right reels 13L, 13M, 13R are independently driven to rotate.

  Returning to FIG. 1, the operation plate 7 is provided with a bet switch 15 for instructing the player to insert medals one by one from the credit medals stored therein. ) The maximum bet switch 17 for instructing the insertion of the maximum number of coins (set to three) of the specified number per coin, and the player rotates each reel 13L, 13M, 13R to variably display each symbol. Lever-shaped start switch 19 (corresponding to the "start operation means" of the present invention) for performing an operation to start the player, each rotation by stopping the rotation of the left, middle, right reel 13L, 13M, 13R respectively The left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R for performing the operation for stopping the variable display (corresponding to "stop operation means" of the present invention) A payment switch 23 and a medal insertion slot 25 for the player to instruct the payout of credit medals are provided. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the number of inserted medals (regulated number) required for one game (game) is set to one of three.

  Also, in the substantially center above the front plate 9, a video or the like is displayed to notify the player of winning or winning, or the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R necessary for winning are awarded. A liquid crystal display 27 is provided for performing an effect of notifying an operation mode, and an explanation panel 29 on which various winning symbols are displayed is provided immediately above the liquid crystal display 27, and the liquid crystal display 27 and Speakers 31 </ b> L and 31 </ b> R are provided on the left and right of the explanation panel 29 for producing an effect by music or voice. Speakers 31L and 31R are also provided on the left and right of the medal payout port 39, which will be described later.

  Further, a central lamp portion 33M is arranged on the upper side of the explanation panel 29 and the speakers 31L and 31R, and left and right lamp portions 33L and 33R are arranged on the left and right sides thereof, respectively. A light source such as a light emitting diode is provided in each of the central, left and right lamp portions 33M, 33L, 33R. These center / left / right lamp parts 33M, 33L, 33R are integrally formed to constitute an upper lamp part 33 for performing an effect such as notifying a player of winning or winning.

  A lower panel 35 on which a decorative image or the like is displayed is provided below the operation plate 7. On the left and right sides of the lower panel 35, a plurality of light sources are arranged, for example, in two rows. 37L and 37R are provided. Further, below the lower panel 35, a medal payout opening 39 and a medal receiver 41 for receiving medals paid out from the medal payout opening 39 are provided. A graphic (not shown) showing the positions of the pay lines for the three reels is drawn at the lower right corner of the front plate 9, and the CPU 61 mounted on the main control board 63 of FIG. 3 is provided at the lower left corner of the front plate 9. Under the display control by, the credit indicator 45 for displaying the accumulated number of credit medals and the payout indicator 46 for displaying the number of medals paid out are provided. The credit indicator 45 is composed of, for example, two 7-segment displays, and is capable of displaying a 2-digit stored number (up to 50). The payout indicator 46 is composed of, for example, two 7-segment displays, and can display a 2-digit payout number. The 7-segment display has a total of 8 segments that are formed in the shape of a bar and that combine 7 segments arranged in the shape of "8" and one small round segment that serves as the decimal point. Yes, each segment is composed of a light emitting diode (see FIG. 11). Here, the payout indicator 46 is also used to display an error code corresponding to the error that has occurred, and the tens digit, the ones digit, or both dots of the payout indicator 46 (lightable point DP in FIG. 11) are It is also used as an advantageous section lamp 47 (see FIG. 3), and the lighting is an AT allowed state in which an AT game is allowed in which the advantageous operation mode of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R can be specified in a specific manner. (Advantageous section), and extinguishing means not an advantageous section. However, the advantageous zone lamp may be configured as a separate component from the payout indicator 46, for example, the dot portion of the credit indicator 45 may be used, or another lamp member may be used. The AT game corresponds to the "special game" of the present invention, the AT permissible state corresponds to the "special game permissible state" of the present invention, and the AT non-permissible state that does not allow the AT game is the "special game non-performing" of the present invention. It corresponds to the "permissible state". Further, the advantageous zone lamp 47 corresponds to the “notification lamp” of the present invention.

  Although not shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. 4, a support frame 13 that supports the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is fixed to the rear wall of the housing 3, A hopper unit 43 for discharging medals to the medal payout opening 39 is arranged below the support frame 13 in the housing 3. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, on the back side near the medal insertion slot 25, it is selected whether the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 25 are genuine or not, and only the regular medals are stored in the hopper unit 43. A leading medal selector 48 is provided. A medal passage (not shown) is provided inside the housing 3, and medals rejected as non-genuine medals by the medal selector 48 and medals paid out from the hopper unit 43 pass through the medal passage. Are paid out from the medal payout exit 39. Specifically, although not shown in the figure, the medal selector 48 stores the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 25 in the hopper unit 43 by the operation of the rail portion by driving the cancel coil using an electromagnet. The passage and the passage for advancing from the medal payout opening 39 to the medal receiver 41 are switchable. As a result, it is possible to switch whether the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 25 are stored as credit medals or paid out to the medal receiver 41. However, for example, when the number of stored medals reaches the maximum number or during the game, the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 25 are discharged to the medal payout outlet 39 without the rail portion being operated by the driving of the cancel coil. In other cases, the rail portion is actuated by driving the cancel coil under the drive control by the main CPU 61 mounted on the main control board 63 of FIG. 3, and the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 25 are normal. Whether or not it is selected and only the regular medal is guided to the hopper unit 43.

  As shown in FIG. 3, an insertion sensor 53 is provided in the medal selector 48 in the vicinity of the medal insertion opening 25 inside the housing 3, and the insertion sensor 53 detects the medals inserted into the medal insertion opening 25 one by one. .. The insertion sensor 53 is formed by three selector sensors A, B, and C provided in the medal passage, and the inserted medal is arranged in the order of the selector sensor C, the selector sensor A, and the selector sensor B. And are arranged so as to be detected at a time interval (timing) within a predetermined range. A payout sensor 54 is provided at the exit of the hopper unit 43, and the payout sensor 54 detects the medals paid out to the medal payout opening 39 one by one. The payout sensor 54 is provided with a payout sensor A and a payout sensor B with a predetermined distance therebetween. In the timing chart at the time of passing the medal in the normal state, both payout sensors A and B can be switched to the ON state while the hopper motor 57 is driving (ON state). Further, the payout sensor B is set to transition from the off state to the on state twice, and when the payout sensor B is in the first on state, the payout sensor A transitions from the off state to the on state. The arrangement is such that the payout sensor A shifts from the on state to the off state when B is in the second on state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, an operation box 50 is provided, and a power switch 50a for switching the power on and off, a key cylinder type setting change key switch 50b, and a push button type setting change button 50c are provided. ing. It should be noted that the setting can be changed by setting the winning probability used when selecting one of the plurality of lottery tables 671 (see FIG. 7) having different degrees of advantage in the role lottery (from setting 1). This is a process for setting 6).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a set value indicator 56 is provided, and the set value indicator 56 is composed of, for example, one 7-segment display and has a set value of the winning probability of one digit (specifically, , 6 stages from 1 to 6) are displayed. The 7-segment display has a total of 8 segments that are formed in the shape of a bar and are composed of 7 segments arranged in the shape of an "8" and one small round segment that serves as the decimal point. Yes, each segment is composed of a light emitting diode (see FIG. 11). Although the set value of the slot machine 1 is displayed on the set value display 56, it is provided inside the housing 3, more specifically, on the back surface of the front door 5 so as not to be visible from the outside. After setting the set value, the display is erased.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a door sensor (door opening / closing switch) 58 is provided, and the door sensor 58 is installed on the housing 3 side and whether the front door 5 is closed or not. It is a sensor for detecting whether or not. For example, when the front door 5 is closed, the door sensor 58 is turned on (on) by the contact sensor when the back surface of the front door 5 and the front surface of the door sensor 58 come close to each other, and the front door 5 As the door is opened, the back surface of the front door 5 is separated from the front surface of the door sensor 58 and is brought into an off state (OFF state) by the contact sensor. Of course, the present invention is not limited to the contact sensor, and the opening / closing of the front door 5 may be detected by an optical sensor, a magnetic sensor, or the like.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, left / middle / right position sensors 55L, 55M, 55R are provided for detecting the rotational positions of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R, respectively. The position sensors 55L, 55M, 55R are, for example, photo interrupters for detecting protrusions provided on the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, 13R, respectively, and when the left, middle, right reels 13L, 13M, 13R rotate. , The protrusion is detected every one turn, and the detection signal is output to the main CPU 61 of the main control board 63. In the present embodiment, for example, when the left / middle / right position sensors 55L, 55M, 55R detect the protrusions, the symbol with the frame number 20 is arranged in the middle of the display window 11, respectively.

  The hopper motor 57 shown in FIG. 3 is arranged in the hopper unit 43, and drives it to pay out medals toward the medal payout opening 39. Further, the overflow sensor 57a is provided in the vicinity of an auxiliary tank for storing medals overflowing from the medal tank of the hopper unit 43 for storing medals, and detects that the auxiliary tank is full of medals. A signal is output to the main CPU 61 of the control board 63.

  An external centralized terminal board 59 is provided inside the housing 3. The external centralized terminal board 59 outputs game data to the outside of the slot machine 1, and is connected to a connection terminal (connector) wired to the main CPU 61 of the main control board 63 and an external device (not shown). It is a terminal board provided with connection terminals (connectors). Although not shown, the external centralized terminal board 59 is connected to a game island facility (for example, a data display) or a hall computer.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control board 63 in which a main CPU 61 that controls the progress of the game is mounted, and based on the information transmitted from the main control board 63, the effect control according to the progress of the game is performed. A sub control board 73 on which the sub CPU 71 is mounted is provided separately, and various data is transmitted from the main control board 63 to the sub control board 73 in one direction. The main control board 63 is housed in a board case so that it cannot be illegally accessed from the outside, and is strictly sealed so that the board case cannot be opened without leaving a trace. There is. In addition, various measures are taken on the substrate case so that it can be surely visually confirmed that the substrate case has been illegally opened.

  The RWM (read / write memory) 65 of the main control board 63 is a storage capacity inside the main CPU 61, and temporarily stores data regarding a game such as a game state of the slot machine 1. The ROM 67 of the main control board 63 is a storage capacity inside the main CPU 61 and stores a game machine program (a program for the slot machine 1) including preset data.

  By the way, the ROM 67 has a capacity of, for example, 16 KB (kilobytes), and an area of 7.5 KB (program area 4.5 KB + data area 3 KB) starting at address 0000H is a program and various tables 671 and 672 related to the progress of the game, Used to store required data. Also, as will be described later in detail, in order to monitor the payout history of medals, the total payout number of medals for every 400 games in the area of 4.35 KB of the remaining 8.5 KB starting from address 1E50H of ROM 67. It is used to store a game information monitoring program and data such as 15 sets, the total payout number of medals in the latest 6000 games, and the total payout number of medals after installation or after RWM clear.

  The RWM 65 has a capacity of 1024B (bytes), and an area of 512B starting from the address F000H is used to temporarily store various data necessary for executing a program relating to the progress of a game. In addition, as will be described later in detail, in order to monitor the game history of medals in the unused area of the remaining 512B beginning with the address F200H of the RWM 65, 15 sets of the total payout number of medals for every 400 games are most recent. Various data (see FIG. 10) relating to the game information such as the total payout number of medals of 6000 games and the total payout number of medals after installation or after RWM clear is stored.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, on one surface 63A of the main control board 63 (component mounting surface of the main control board 63), a ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 composed of four display components is provided. Has been. As shown in FIG. 4, the ratio indicator 69 is mounted on the main control board 63 in the board case installed inside the housing 3 and above the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, 13R. Thus, when the front door 5 is opened, it is arranged at a position visible from the outside. Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the ratio indicator 69 is composed of four 7-segment displays Sd which are display components. The 7-segment display Sd is formed in a rod shape and arranged in a shape of “8”. It has a total of eight segments that are a combination of the seven segments formed and one small round segment that serves as a decimal point, and each segment is composed of a light emitting diode (see FIG. 11). Switch control is performed by the main CPU 61 to control lighting and extinction of the light emitting diode, and VDD and GND are supplied to at least one of the anode and the cathode of the light emitting diode via the switch. In FIG. 5, CS is a transparent resin substrate case accommodating the main control substrate 63, K is a caulking portion for sealing the substrate case CS, and CN is a connector. Details of the arrangement of parts (connector, ratio indicator, main CPU, IC, etc.) in FIG. 5 will be described later.

  By the way, in each of the 7-segment displays Sd constituting the ratio indicator 69, as shown in FIG. 6, adjacent 7-segment displays Sd are arranged side by side at a predetermined interval, and the main display is provided between the adjacent 7-segment displays Sd. A gap Gp through which the one surface 63A of the control board 63 can be seen is provided. In this way, by providing the gap Gp between the adjacent 7-segment displays Sd, the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 and the facing surface (the lower surface of the ratio display 69) of the one surface 63A of the ratio display 69 are formed. Even if an illegal component Wc (one-dot chain line in FIG. 6) that causes an illegal game operation in a slot machine such as an illegal IC is mounted between the two, the one side 63A side of the main control board 63 via the gap Gp Therefore, it is possible to easily find an illegal component Wc such as an illegal IC hidden on the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69, and prevent the illegal component Wc from being mounted. It should be noted that among the four 7-segment displays Sd, it is sufficient to provide the gap Gp between at least one set of adjacent 7-segment displays Sd, and it is not always necessary to provide the gap Gp between all the adjacent 7-segment displays Sd. ..

  Furthermore, the connection terminal T of each 7-segment display Sd is soldered to the wiring pattern formed on the other surface side of the main control board 63 opposite to the one surface 63A, but the T connection terminal of each 7-segment display Sd is connected. Are preferably arranged on the side surface on the gap Gp side as shown in FIG. In this case, the connection terminal T of the 7-segment display Sd interferes with the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 and the one surface 63A of the ratio indicator 69 including the four 7-segment displays Sd, which faces the one surface ( It is not possible to mount an illegal component such as an illegal IC between the ratio display 69 and the lower surface thereof, and it is possible to reliably prevent the illegal component from being mounted on the lower surface of the ratio display 69.

  Further, returning to FIG. 3, the main CPU 61 of the main control board 63 described above has an interrupt function such as a timer interrupt, and executes the game machine program stored in the ROM 67, thereby relating to the progress of the game. Perform processing. Then, the main CPU 61 has data relating to a winning combination lottery result in the lottery processing by the winning combination lottery means 103 described later, data relating to the operation of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R, the start switch 19, etc. operated by the player. Various data of the above are transmitted to the sub control board 73 (sub CPU 71) in the command format.

  The sub-control board 73 includes a memory 75 having an RWM section that temporarily stores various data and a ROM section that stores various programs for performance. Further, the sub CPU 71 of the sub control board 73 has an interrupt function such as a timer interrupt, and the sub CPU 71 transmits various data regarding the slot machine 1 transmitted from the main CPU 61 (in the lottery process by the role lottery means 103 described later). By executing a program stored in the memory 75 based on the result of the lottery, data regarding whether or not the operating tools such as the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R and the start switch 19 are operated, the game is played. The content of the production related to the game to be provided to the player is determined. In addition, the sub CPU 71 of the sub control board 73 controls the production equipment such as the liquid crystal display 27 and the speakers 31L and 31R via the I / O port of the sub control board 73 based on the determined content of the presentation. I do.

(Main control board)
Next, the configuration of the main control board 63 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 7, the main control board 63 has various functions realized by executing a program stored in the ROM 67 and various functions realized by controlling hardware. ..

(1) Game control means 100
The game control means 100 of FIG. 7 controls the game of the slot machine 1 and executes a normal game which is a general game and a special game which is a game which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. As shown in FIG. 3, the operation mode determination means 100a and the game state setting means 100b are provided.

a) Operation mode determination means 100a
The operation mode determination means 100a of FIG. 7 determines whether or not the player has operated the slot machine 1 and the mode such as long pressing. Specifically, the bet switch 15, the maximum bet switch 17, the start switch 19, the left switch Various operations on the slot machine 1 by the player, such as the operation mode by the player for various switches such as the middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R and the operation mode for the player to insert medals into the medal slot 25. The mode of is determined.

b) Game state setting means 100b
The game state setting means 100b of FIG. 7 is a result of the lottery processing by the role lottery means 103 described later, and a symbol determination means of the display mode of the symbols of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R displayed on the display window 11. Based on the judgment result by 109, etc., the gaming state of the slot machine 1 is set to any one of a plurality of preset gaming states.

  Specifically, in a normal game state in which a normal game is executed, a predetermined special combination (BB, CB) is won (if "7-7-7" is on the winning line, BB is won, and on the winning line is " When "BAR-BAR-BAR" is prepared, CB wins), the game state setting means 100b sets the game state of the slot machine 1 to the special game state in which the special game is executed. Then, in the special game state, if a predetermined number of medals are paid out or a predetermined number of games (games) are executed, and the special game end condition is satisfied, the special game is ended and the slot machine The game state of 1 is set to the normal game state by the game state setting means 100b.

  Further, in the normal game state, if the special combination is not won despite winning the special combination, that is, the symbols corresponding to the special combination are set in the middle line of the display window 11. When the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are not stopped as displayed on the line (center line), the gaming state of the slot machine 1 is the internal winning in which the game during the internal winning is executed. It is set to the middle game state by the game state setting means 100b. Further, in the internal winning game state, by winning a special combination carried inside without winning, the game state of the slot machine 1 is set to the special game state by the game state setting means 100b.

  Here, the outline of the game in the slot machine 1 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the slot machine 1 is designed to execute a game by inserting three medals, and the insertion sensor 53, the bet switch 15 or the maximum bet switch 17 allows the slot machine 1 to receive three medals. When the insertion is detected, the pay line (center line) in the middle of the display window 11 becomes effective. Then, when the operation of the start switch 19 is detected on condition that the specified number of medals is inserted, one of the preset lottery results is set by a lottery process using a random number, which will be described later. Determined by 103. Further, all the rotations of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R are started, and the symbols of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R displayed on the display window 11 are displayed on the left / middle / right reels 13L, Discrimination is started according to the rotation angles of 13M and 13R.

  After that, the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R are accelerated, and the operation of all the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R is effectively accepted. After the operation of all the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R becomes effective, for example, when it is detected that the left stop switch 21L is operated, the left reel 13L is stopped and the middle stop switch 21M is operated. When it is detected that the right reel switch 13R is operated, the middle reel 13M is stopped, and when it is detected that the right stop switch 21R is operated, the right reel 13R is stopped. Thus, by operating the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R, the rotation of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R corresponding to the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R is stopped. To do.

  When all the operations of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are completed, all the rotations of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R are stopped. At this time, when the symbol of the predetermined winning combination determined by the combination lottery means 103 is stopped at a predetermined position on the winning line in the middle row of the activated display window 11, it becomes a winning prize, and the number of medals according to the winning mode is achieved. However, the game is ended by being credited or paid out from the medal payout exit 39. In addition, instead of payout of medals, or along with payout of medals, a predetermined profit may be given to the player.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, as a winning combination, a special winning combination (bonus: BB, CB), a small winning combination (middle-stage bell, one-sheet winning combination 1-12, middle-tier cherry), a re-playing combination (replays 1-8) Is preset. In the present embodiment, as the winning combination lottery result, different winning combinations (“middle bell”, “single winning combination 1” to “single winning combination 12”, “replay 1” to “replay 8”) can be arranged according to the operation mode. There is a possibility to win multiple overlapping wins (winning group: left bell, middle bell, right bell, common bell 2, replay). Then, the part lottery results of the part lottery means 103 include a special part winning (bonus winning), a small part winning, a re-game part winning (replay winning), and a loss.

  In addition, as for winning, a special role winning (bonus winning) relating to a transition to a special game (bonus game), a small winning role winning relating to payout of medals, and a replay winning combination relating to execution of a replay (replay) ( There is a replay prize).

  Then, for example, when three symbols of each of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are arranged on the pay line in each display mode related to the combinations “BB” and “CB” of FIG. 8, the special combination is won. Then, a bonus game (special game) is executed.

  It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, there is no payout of medals due to winning of a special role (the prescribed payout number of special roles is 0), and the game is shifted to the bonus game after the game in which the winning mode for the special role is established. However, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prescribed payout numbers may be set for the special combination, and the bonus game may be started after payout of medals.

  Further, for example, the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are displayed in the respective display modes related to the winning combination “middle bell”, “single winning combination 1” to “single winning combination 12”, and “middle cherry” in FIG. When three symbols are lined up on the pay line in the middle of the display window 11, a small prize is won and the number of medals shown in the "Payout Number" column is paid out.

  In addition, as for “any” used as a display mode related to winning of the combination “middle cherry” in FIG. 8, any symbols provided on the middle reel 13M and the right reel 13R may be arranged on the winning line. It means that.

  In addition, when the three symbols of each of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are arranged on the pay line in the display mode related to the combinations “Replay 1” to “Replay 8” in FIG. 8, the replay combination wins. , The game can be played again under the same conditions as the previous game without inserting a new medal.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, the winning combination lottery means 103 is configured to be able to win a plurality of winning combinations at the same time. That is, as shown in FIG. 9, a winning combination group (a combination lottery result) formed of a plurality of combinations is formed, and whether or not each winning combination group is won is selected by the combination lottery means 103. Of the winning groups, the winning groups "left bell", "middle bell", "right bell" (hereinafter, the winning groups "left bell", "middle bell", "right bell" are collectively referred to as "bell group" ", And" common bell 2 "each include a plurality of winning combinations. Specifically, the winning group "left bell" is composed of "middle bell" and "one piece combination 1" to "one piece combination 4", and the winning group "middle bell" is "middle bell", The winning group "right bell" is composed of "single hand 5" to "one hand 8", and the winning group "right bell" is composed of "middle bell" and "one hand 9" to "one hand 12". The group “common bell 2” is composed of “middle bell” and “single hand combination 1”.

  Therefore, if it is determined by the role lottery means 103, which will be described later, that the winning group “left bell” has been won, it means that the “middle-stage bell” and the “one-piece hand 1” to “one-piece hand 4” are won at the same time. If it is decided that the winning group “Middle Bell” has been won, it means that the “middle-stage bell” and “single hand role 5” to “single hand role 8” have been won at the same time. If it is decided that "winning bell", "one piece combination 9" to "one piece combination 12" are won at the same time, it is decided that the winning group "common bell 2" has been won. If so, it means that you have won both the "middle bell" and the "single hand role 1" at the same time.

  In the present embodiment, the operating modes of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R that are advantageous to the player for the winning group “left bell”, “middle bell”, and “right bell” ( Even if the winning lottery results (winning winning groups) by the winning lottery means 103 are the same, as shown in the “Remarks” column of FIG. The reel rotation control means 106 stops the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R so that the winning mode (display mode) varies depending on the order in which the middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are operated. Is configured to control.

  That is, by winning one of the winning group “left bell”, “middle bell”, and “right bell” shown in FIG. The reel rotation control means 106 is configured such that the winning combinations of winning symbols are preferentially arranged on the winning line in correspondence with the operation order of the stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R. ..

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, for example, when the winning lottery result by the winning lottery means 103 indicates that the winning group “left bell” is won, the operation mode determining means 100a first causes the left stop switch 21L. When it is determined that the operation has been performed, the symbols are displayed in a state where the symbols “Bell”, which is the display mode corresponding to the winning combination “middle bell” that is most advantageous to the player, are aligned on the winning line. The left, center and right reels 13L, 13M and 13R are stopped and controlled by the reel rotation control means 106.

  On the other hand, when it is determined by the operation mode determination means 100a that the left stop switch 21L is not operated first, the symbols "Bell", which is the display mode corresponding to the winning combination "middle bell", are lined up on the winning line. The design is not displayed in the closed state. That is, the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R are operated in the preset operation sequence corresponding to the winning combination group (“left bell”, “middle bell”, “right bell”). Unless determined by the operation mode determination means 100a, the symbols are not displayed in the display mode corresponding to the winning combination most advantageous to the players included in the winning combination group.

  By winning the winning group “Common Bell 2” shown in FIG. 9, when multiple winning hands are simultaneously won, as shown in the “Remarks” column of FIG. 9, the left / middle / right stop switches are displayed. 21L, 21M, 21R, regardless of the operation sequence, the symbols "Bell", which is the display mode corresponding to the winning combination "middle bell" among the winning combinations, are displayed in a state of being aligned on the pay line. The left / center / right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are stopped and controlled by the reel rotation control means 106.

  By the way, the special game (bonus game) is a game in which the winning probability of a small role is set higher than that of the normal game, and the game medal is more likely to be paid out, which is a game more advantageous to the player than the normal game. Yes, this is a game in which the player can win more medals.

  When the player enters the special game state by winning the special combination “BB” in FIG. 8, the big bonus game is executed. In the big bonus game, the regular bonus game is continuously executed. In the regular bonus game, the lottery table 671 which defines the winning probability of the lottery process by the role lottery means 103 is the winning probability of the lottery process by the role lottery means 103 from the normal game lottery table selected in the normal game. By switching to the special game lottery table defined with a higher probability than in the case, it is set that the winning probability of the small winning combination becomes higher than that during the normal game. As a result, the special game becomes a game advantageous to the player as compared with the normal game. Then, after shifting to the regular bonus game, the regular bonus game ends when the game is performed a preset number of times, for example, seven times. Then, after shifting to the big bonus game, when a preset number of medals are paid out, the big bonus game is ended. That is, in the present embodiment, the big bonus game is set to end the special game (big bonus game) and shift to the normal game when the number of medals paid out in the big bonus game reaches a predetermined upper limit number. ing.

  Further, when the special game state is entered by winning the special role “CB” in FIG. 8, the challenge bonus game is executed. In the challenge bonus game, all the winning positions are achieved, and the state where the pull-in range of the left reel is smaller than usual continues until the payout number of the specified number. After shifting to the challenge bonus game, when the preset number of medals is paid out, the challenge bonus game is ended.

  In addition, when the winning combination lottery result of the winning combination lottery means 103 becomes a special winning combination (BB, CB), the stop control of symbols based on the special winning combination is performed, but at this time, the symbol arrangement of the winning mode of the special winning combination is allocated. If this is not done, the state shifts to the gaming state during internal winning, and this special winning is carried over until the symbol arrangement of the winning mode of the special winning is assigned.

  On the other hand, the small winning combination cannot be carried over to the next game unless the symbol arrangement of the winning mode of the small winning combination can be assigned in the game in which the small lot winning result is the small winning combination. Also, in the case of replay winning, even if the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are operated at any timing, the symbol relating to any one of “Replay 1” to “Replay 8” is surely won. The symbols are arranged on the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R so that they are aligned on the line.

  By the way, in the case of winning one of the winning group “left bell”, “middle bell”, and “right bell”, the left / middle / right stop switch 21L at any timing as in the case of the symbol relating to the replay. , 21M, 21R are operated, the symbols (“Bell”, “R1”, “R2”) related to the winning group “left bell”, “middle bell”, and “right bell” are always on the winning line. Since the symbols of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are arranged as described above, the player always wins the "middle bell" or any of the "single hand combination 1" to "one hand combination 12". That is, when the winning group “left bell”, “middle bell”, or “right bell” is won, if the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are operated, left / middle / No matter what timing the right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R are operated, the left, middle, and right reels are arranged so that the winning symbols (see FIG. 8) associated with each operation mode are aligned on the winning line. The reel rotation control means 106 stop-controls 13L, 13M, and 13R.

  Also, in the case of winning the winning group “Common Bell 2”, as described above, the winning “middle bell” is given priority regardless of the operation order of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R, The symbols of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R are arranged so that the symbols (“Bell”) related to the winning combination “Middle Bell” are always aligned on the winning line, so the prize is always “Middle Bell” To do. That is, if the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are operated when the winning group “common bell 2” is won, what kind of left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are operated. Even if operated at a timing, the reel rotation control means 106 stops and controls the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R so that the symbols (see FIG. 8) related to the winning combination "middle bell" are aligned on the winning line. It

  Further, the game state setting means 100b determines and determines whether or not to shift from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissible state based on the role lottery result of the role lottery means 103 described later in the game in the AT non-permissible state. The AT allowance state is set from the next game after the game. In the present embodiment, the gaming state setting means 100b determines to shift from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissible state when the winning group "middle tier cherry", "common bell 1", "common bell 2" is won. To do. Then, the game state setting means 100b gives the preset number of times (for example, 20 times) as the number of games in the AT allowed state and sets it in the AT remaining game number counter 654, and the AT (assist time) period from the next game. The AT game is configured to be executed. In AT games, when the winning group “left bell”, “middle bell”, or “right bell” is won, the type of winning group (“left bell”, “middle bell”, “right bell”) The operation mode (which stop switch should be operated first) according to the above) is notified to the player. Further, the game state setting means 100b performs a lottery to determine whether or not to add the number of games in the AT allowable state when the winning group "Replay" is won in the game in the AT allowable state, and the AT remaining game number counter The number of games (may be 0) corresponding to the lottery result is added to 654. The game state setting means 100b decrements the AT remaining game number counter 654 by 1 for each game regardless of whether or not the AT game is played in the AT allowed state. Further, when the game state setting means 100b determines to shift from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissible state, the AT continuous game number counter 655 has a predetermined number (for example, 1500) as the maximum number of games in one AT permissible state. Is set, and the AT continuous game number counter 655 is decremented by 1 for each game regardless of whether the AT game is played in the AT allowable state. The game state setting means 100b has won a falling lottery as to whether or not to fall from the AT allowable state to the AT non-allowable state after the AT remaining game number counter 654 becomes 0, or the AT continuous game number counter 655 is 0. The AT non-permissible state is set from the game next to the game that became.

(2) Setting control means 101
The setting control means 101 of FIG. 7 sets a set value (setting 1 to setting 6). This set value is for selecting the lottery table 671 selected by the table selection means 102 described later, and any of the set values is associated with each of the plurality of lottery tables 671 stored in the ROM 67. ing. Then, the setting control unit 101 determines the ON / OFF state of the setting change key switch 50b when the power is turned on, and when the power is turned on while the setting change key switch 50b is on, a predetermined setting change process is started.

  In the present embodiment, the winning probability in the lottery of the normal game is set in a plurality of stages that are distinguished by a plurality of types of setting values (here, six types), and the lottery table 671 (normal) is set for each of the plurality of stages of setting values. (Lottery table for game) is associated. Then, when the setting change process is started, the manager of the pachinko hall in which the slot machine 1 is installed can change this set value.

  The procedure for changing the set value is performed as follows, for example. The administrator opens the front door 5, inserts a setting change key (not shown) into the key cylinder with the power switch 50a turned off, and rotates the key to turn on the setting change key switch 50b. In this state, the power supply switch 50a is turned on to start the setting change process.

  Then, the setting value of the winning probability is cyclically switched from the setting 1 to the setting 6 every time the administrator operates the setting change button 50c. This set value is notified by displaying it on the set value display 56. When the setting value of the winning probability reaches a desired value by operating the setting change button 50c, the setting value is fixed by operating the start switch 19. When the setting change key inserted in the key cylinder is rotated to turn off the setting change key switch 50b, the setting change process ends. After that, for example, when a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 25, the game is started.

(3) Table selection means 102
The table selection means 102 in FIG. 7 is a type of game controlled by the game control means 100 on the main control board 63 (normal game, internally winning game, special game, etc.), and setting values set by the setting control means 101 ( Based on the settings 1 to 6), one lottery table is selected from the plurality of lottery tables 671. That is, for example, in the normal game, the table selection means 102 selects the lottery table 671 (the normal game lottery table) as the lottery table in accordance with the winning probability setting values (setting 1 to setting 6).

(4) Role lottery means 103
The role lottery means 103 of FIG. 7 uses a random number and the table selection means 102 as one of the preset lottery results including a winning group win and a preset win, as a lottery result in the current game. The lottery process is performed by using the selected lottery table 671 and is selected. Here, in each lottery table 671, the correspondence relationship between the random number value and each winning lottery result is defined. Specifically, for example, in each lottery table 671, a random number generated by the random number generation means 103a described later is generated. In the entire range, data indicating the area associated with each winning lottery result is stored.

a) Random number generating means 103a
The random number generation means 103a of FIG. 7 generates random numbers for lottery within a predetermined random number value range. Further, the random number generation means 103a can be configured by, for example, an oscillation circuit and a counter circuit that counts the clock signal generated by this oscillation circuit (so-called hard random number). The random number generating means 103a can be configured by, for example, a means for generating a random number by the average sampling method or a means for generating a random number by adding prime numbers. These means can be configured, for example, by causing the main CPU 61 to execute a predetermined program (so-called soft random number). Note that both hard random numbers and soft random numbers may be provided, and the random numbers may be generated by software based on the results.

b) Random number extraction means 103b
The random number extraction means 103b of FIG. 7 extracts the random number value generated by the random number generation means 103a, and extracts the random number value generated by the random number generation means 103a under a predetermined condition. The random number extraction means 103b extracts a random number value used in the lottery processing of the role lottery means 103 in the current game at the timing when the start switch 19 is operated.

  Further, since the random number generation means 103a is composed of a counter circuit or the like, the numerical values generated by the random number generation means 103a are not strictly random numbers. However, since the timing at which the start switch 19 is operated is considered to be random, the numerical value extracted by the random number extraction means 103b can be treated substantially as a random number.

c) lottery result determination means 103c
The lottery result determination means 103c of FIG. 7 determines the role lottery result in the current game based on the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means 103b in the current game and the game state in the current game. The lottery result determination means 103c refers to the lottery table 671 corresponding to the current game state selected by the table selection means 102, and the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means 103b is defined by the lottery table 671. The role lottery result in the current game is determined by determining which of the random number areas corresponding to each role lottery result belongs.

(5) Reel detection means 105
The reel detecting means 105 of FIG. 7 detects the detection signals of the left / middle / right position sensors 55L, 55M, 55R and the left / middle / right reel motors 14L, 14M for driving the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R. , 14R, the rotational positions of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, 13R are detected. The reel detection means 105 corresponds to a symbol located at a predetermined reference position (for example, in the middle stage of the display window 11 in the present embodiment) during rotation of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R and at the time of rotation stop. Detect each frame number.

(6) Reel rotation control means 106
The reel rotation control means 106 of FIG. 7 is configured to control the excitation phase of each reel motor 14L, 14M, 14R and individually control the rotation of each reel 13L, 13M, 13R. When the player operates the start switch 19, the reel rotation control means 107 controls the excitation phase of each reel motor 14L, 14M, 14R to start the rotation of each reel 13L, 13M, 13R. Further, the reel rotation control means 106 uses the stop table 672 to perform stop control for each of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R based on the operation for each of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R. Then, the symbols variably displayed on each of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R are stopped in a display mode corresponding to the winning combination lottery result of the winning combination lottery means 103. This stop control means 106, for each game, the left / middle / right reel 13L, based on the winning combination lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means 103c and the operation mode of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R. Stop control of 13M and 13R is performed.

  In addition, as described in the column of "Remarks" in FIG. 9, when the "bell group" (any of the winning group "left bell", "middle bell", and "right bell") is won , Depending on which stop switch is operated first, different winning combinations are set. In addition, advantageous operation modes differ depending on the type of “bell group”.

  As the stop table 672 for determining the stop positions of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, 13R, a plurality of tables are set corresponding to each of the winning lottery results of the winning lottery means 103. The stop table 672 is provided for the left / middle / right reels according to the rotational positions of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R when the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are operated. The number of sliding pieces of 13L, 13M, and 13R is predetermined, and the stop operation order of the corresponding left, middle, and right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R is determined for each of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R. Correspondingly, the number of sliding pieces is different.

  Further, if the winning combination lottery result of the winning combination lottery means 103 is a win for any of the winning combinations, the reel rotation control means 106 stops at the stop table 672 selected based on the winning combination lottery result and the left / middle / right stop. Based on the rotational positions of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R when the switches 21L, 21M, 21R are operated, the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R are respectively selected so as to win the winning combination. The number of sliding frames is determined, and the stop control of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is performed. On the other hand, if the winning combination lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 103 is lost, the reel rotation control means 106 causes the stop table 672 selected based on the lost winning combination lottery result and the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M ,. Based on the rotational positions of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R when each of the 21R is operated, the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R are set so as not to win any of the plurality of winning combinations. The number of sliding pieces is determined, and stop control of the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, 13R is performed.

  By the way, there is an upper limit on the number of sliding pieces, and the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the timings of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R respectively located at predetermined rotation positions are set. If not operated, the reel rotation control means 106, even if the winning combination lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 103 is a winning of any winning combination, the symbol displayed in the display window 11 corresponds to the winning combination. The left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R cannot be stop-controlled so as to be stopped and displayed in a mode. In other words, the reel rotation control means 106, based on the winning combination lottery result of the winning combination lottery means 103, the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R corresponding to the left / middle / right reels at the respective timings. On condition that the right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are operated, the symbols displayed in the display window 11 are stopped and displayed in the winning mode corresponding to the winning combination, so that the left, middle and right reels 13L, Each of 13M and 13R is stopped and controlled.

(7) Notification determination means 107
The notification determination means 107 of FIG. 7 determines whether or not to notify the operation mode of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R that is advantageous to the player. For example, even when the result of the lottery is "right bell", if the player cannot know that, the player does not always operate the right stop switch 21R first, and the "middle bell" is selected. It is not always possible to align them. On the other hand, in the AT game, when the part lottery result becomes "right bell", the fact is notified, and the right stop switch 21R is prompted to be operated first, thereby increasing the opportunity for the player to receive the payout. It will be possible.

  Here, it is possible to shift from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissible state by winning "middle tier cherry", "common bell 1", and "common bell 2" that are the transition roles to the AT permissible state in which the AT game can be drawn. When determined, the notification determination unit 107 sets the flag of the AT period flag stored in the flag storage unit 651 to ON after it is determined that the notification is performed and the medal is paid out. Further, the state of the flag during the AT period stored in the flag storage means 651 is set to OFF after paying out medals, for example, when the AT remaining game number counter 654 or the AT continuous game number counter 655 becomes 0. Also, by assigning one of the bits forming the flag storage means 651 to the AT period flag and setting ON or OFF of the bit, the state of the AT period flag is stored in the flag storage means 651. can do.

  Then, in the AT game, when the winning group “left bell”, “middle bell”, or “right bell” is won, an operation mode advantageous to the player preset in each winning group ( The operation order is notified to the player.

  Further, as will be described later, the command creating means 108 creates a command according to the decision result of the notification decision means 107. The notification determining unit 107 uses the command created by the command creating unit 108 as a command that can identify the type of the winning bell group (a command that identifies an advantageous operation mode) or a command that cannot identify the type of the winning bell group. It also functions as a command for deciding whether or not (a command whose advantageous operation mode is unknown).

(8) Command creating means 108
The command creating means 108 of FIG. 7 is data of a winning combination lottery result in the lottery processing by the winning combination lottery means 103, left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R, a start switch 19, and other operation equipment operated by a player. A command for transmitting various data such as data related to operation to the sub control board 73 (sub CPU 71) is generated. The command generated by the command creating means 108 is transmitted to the sub control board 73 (sub CPU 71) by the sub control command transmitting means 111 as described later.

  The command creating means 108 creates a command including “0” to “10” as a command that can identify the result of the lottery when the lottery means 103 executes the lottery. As will be described later, the sub control board 73 (sub CPU 71) selects an effect to be executed based on the sent command. In other words, the command creating unit 108 creates a command for instructing the effect contents to be executed in the sub control board 73 (sub CPU 71).

  Then, when the notification determining unit 107 determines not to notify the player of an advantageous operation mode, that is, when the AT period flag is set to OFF, the command creating unit 108 is in any of the “bell groups”. It is possible to identify that the winning crab is won, but create a command that does not include the data indicating the type of winning group (“left bell”, “middle bell”, “right bell”) that won the winning group. .. In addition, when the notification determination unit 107 determines to notify the player of an advantageous operation mode, that is, when the AT period flag is set to ON, the winning combination group (“left bell”, “middle”) Bell), "right bell") is included, and a command capable of identifying the corresponding winning group is created.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, when the AT period flag is OFF, the command creating means 108 wins any of the winning group “left bell”, “middle bell”, and “right bell”. Even in such a case, the same command “1” is created so that it is not possible to identify which of the “bell groups” is the winning group. On the other hand, when the "left bell" is won when the flag is ON during the AT period, the command creating means 108 outputs the "2nd" command, and when the "medium bell" is won, the "3rd" command. If you win the "Right Bell", create the command of "No. 4".

  Further, the command creating means 108 creates the same command for the other winning combination lottery results regardless of whether the flag during the AT period is ON or OFF. For example, if you win "middle tier cherry", you will get "5" command, if you win "BB", you will get "6" command, and if you win "CB", you will get "7" command. , If you win "Replay", create a command of "No. 8", if you win "Common Bell 1", you command "9", if you win "Common Bell 2" Create a command for "No." In the case of a loss, a "0" command is created.

(9) Design determination means 109
The symbol determination means (corresponding to “winning determination means”) 109 of FIG. 7 is the reel rotation control means 106 based on the respective rotation positions of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R detected by the reel detection means 105. It is determined whether the display mode of the symbols by the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R stopped and controlled by is a predetermined display mode.

  The symbol determination means 109 determines that a special winning combination is achieved when the symbols are aligned on the winning line in the display modes shown in the winning combinations “BB” and “CB” in FIG. In addition, the symbol determination means 109, when the symbols are arranged on the pay line in the display modes shown in "middle bell", "one piece combination 1" to "one piece combination 12", and "middle cherry" of FIG. When it is determined that the symbols are to be won and the symbols are aligned on the winning line in the display modes shown in "Replay 1" to "Replay 8" of FIG. 8, the symbol determination unit 109 is determined to be the re-game combination winning.

(10) Payout control means 110
The payout control means 110 of FIG. 7 gives a predetermined profit to the player based on the determination result by the symbol determination means 109. This payout control means 110, when it is determined by the symbol determination means 109 that one of a plurality of winning combinations has won, if the prize is a payout of medals, the accumulated number of credit medals is the upper limit value (the present embodiment). After reaching 50 coins in the form, the hopper unit 43 is operated to pay out the medals corresponding to the winning combination. Further, the payout control means 110 increases the number of credit medals by the above-mentioned payout number instead of the operation of the hopper unit 43 as the payout of medals until the number of stored credit medals reaches the upper limit value.

  By the way, when the symbol determination means 109 determines that the re-play combination is won, the payout control means 110 determines that the specified number (3) of medals have been inserted, and validates the winning line of the next game. To do.

(11) Sub control command transmission means 111
The sub-control command transmitting means 111 of FIG. 7 sends a command including various data created by the command creating means 108 from the main control board 63 (main CPU 61) to the sub-control board 73 (sub-CPU 71) as predetermined information. Send by road. This sub-control command transmitting means 111 is created by the command creating means 108 and is set by the setting control means 101, a normal game state and a special game state, a game state such as an AT non-permissible state and an AT permissible state, The slot machine 1 such as the result of the lottery of the role lottery means 103, the result of the symbol determination by the symbol determination means 109, the rotation / stop state of each of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M and 13R, the payout state of the medals by the payout control means 110, etc. The command including the data representing the state is transmitted to the sub control board 73 (sub CPU 71).

  Further, the sub-control command transmitting means 111 sends a command created by the command creating means 108 including data indicating the detection state of the inserted medals by the insertion sensor 53, the operating states of the bet switch 15 and the maximum bet switch 17, and the like to the sub-control board. 73 (sub CPU 71). Further, the sub-control command transmitting means 111 is created by the command creating means 108 including data indicating that the player has operated various switches such as the start switch 19 and the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R. To the sub control board 73 (sub CPU 71).

(12) Specific event detection means 112
The specific event detection means 112 of FIG. 7 is for detecting whether a specific event has occurred. Specifically, the specific event includes a state in which an abnormal state different from the normal state occurs in the slot machine 1, that is, an error occurrence.

  Specifically, for example, a game medal error, a payout game medal error, a payout failure error, a payout game medal run-out error, an RWM error, a reel error, an overflow error, a game medal payout device connection error, Sensor errors etc. are applicable. Error codes (E0, E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, EA) for classifying the respective types are set to these specific events (errors). Details of these errors will be described later with reference to FIG.

(13) Game stopping means 113
The game stopping means 113 in FIG. 7 is for stopping the game (error processing) so that the game cannot proceed based on the occurrence of the specific event (error) detected by the specific event detecting means 112.

(14) Flag storage means 651
The flag storage unit 651 of FIG. 7 is configured by an area preset in the RWM 65 and stores various flags.

(15) Game number counter 652
The game number counter (400 counter) 652 in FIG. 7 is configured by an area preset in the RWM 65, and stores the number of games (number of games). The initial game number, which is the initial value of the game number counter 652, is set to zero. The number-of-games counter 652 counts the number of games up to a preset number M of games (M = 400 in this embodiment), and then is initialized to 0, which is an initial value, until the number of games M. It is configured to count the number of games. It should be noted that on the program, 0 to 399 are counted, and when 399 is reached, the initial value of 0 is returned again.

(16) Game information storage means 653
The game information storage means 653 of FIG. 7 is configured by an area set in advance in the RWM 65, the predetermined number of games as a predetermined counting standard is 400 games, and the number of set games M as a setting counting standard is 6000, and is shown in FIG. Store data.

  As shown in FIG. 10, a 2-byte storage area (in FIG. 10) for storing the total payout amount for 400 games in each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in the game information storage means 653. (Corresponding to the total payout number of P1 to P15), a storage area of 3 bytes for storing the cumulative value of the total payout number of 400 games in each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 (in FIG. 10). A 4-byte storage area (corresponding to the total payout number of cumulative PS in FIG. 10) for storing the total sum of the total payout numbers after installation or after clearing the RWM is formed. ing.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the game information storage means 653 is a 2-byte storage area for storing the number of bonus payouts for 400 games in each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 (FIG. (Corresponding to P1 to P15 bonus payout numbers in 10), a 3-byte storage area for storing the cumulative value of bonus payout numbers for 400 games in each period from the first period P1 to the 15th period P15 (Corresponding to the cumulative number of bonus characters paid out in PS in FIG. 10), a 4-byte storage area for storing the total cumulative number of bonus payouts after installation or after clearing the RWM (total cumulative bonus characters in FIG. 10). (Corresponding to the payout number) is formed. Here, the number of payouts of the accessory is the total of the number of payouts in BB and the number of payouts in CB. If there is SB, it is the total of the number of payouts in BB, the number of payouts in CB, and the number of payouts in SB. However, SB corresponds to a normal character, the probability of a small character is increased by one game, and even if it is lost, it is not carried over to the next game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the game information storage means 653 is a 2-byte storage area for storing the number of consecutive bonus payouts for 400 games in each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 ( (Corresponding to the number of consecutive bonus payouts from P1 to P15 in FIG. 10), 3 bytes for storing the cumulative value of the number of consecutive bonus payouts for 400 games in each period from the first period P1 to the 15th period P15 Storage area (corresponding to the continuous PS payout number of cumulative PS in FIG. 10), a 4-byte storage area for storing the total cumulative number of continuous bonus payouts after installation or after RWM clear (in FIG. 10). Corresponding to the total cumulative number of consecutive accessory payouts) is formed. Here, the number of continuous accessory payouts is the number of payouts in BB. Even if there is SB, it is the payout number in BB.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, a 4-byte storage area for storing the total number of games after installation or after clearing the RWM in the game information storage means 653 (corresponding to the total number of total games in FIG. 10). , A 4-byte storage area (corresponding to the total number of advantageous section games in FIG. 10) for storing the number of advantageous section games after installation or after clearing the RWM is formed. It is possible to collect information related to the special game permissible state and use this to perform a predetermined calculation.

  As shown in FIG. 10, in the game information storage means 653, the character ratio in the most recent 6000 games (the percentage of the cumulative PS character payout number in FIG. 10 with respect to the cumulative PS total payout number: “character ratio (6000 1) storage area (corresponding to the cumulative PS character ratio in FIG. 10) for storing the game)), and the character ratio in the cumulative game (total cumulative number of character payouts in FIG. 10). Of the total cumulative total number of coins paid out: referred to as a "characteristic ratio (cumulative)". A 1-byte storage area (corresponding to the total cumulative character ratio in FIG. 10) is formed. ing.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, in the game information storage means 653, the ratio of consecutive winnings in the latest 6000 games (the percentage of the consecutive PS payout number of cumulative PS in FIG. 10 to the total payout number of cumulative PS: “consecutive” 1-byte storage area (corresponding to the continuous character ratio of cumulative PS in FIG. 10) for storing the character ratio (6000 game) ”, the ratio of continuous character in the cumulative game (in FIG. 10). Percentage of the total cumulative number of consecutive accessory payouts to the total number of total cumulative payouts: referred to as the "continuous accessory ratio (total)". A 1-byte storage area (of the total cumulative total in FIG. 10). Corresponding to the continuous role ratio) is formed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, in the game information storage unit 653, the advantageous section ratio in the cumulative game (percentage of the total accumulated advantageous section games in FIG. 10 to the total accumulated total number of games: “advantageous section ratio ( 1) storage area (corresponding to the ratio of the total cumulative advantageous intervals in FIG. 10) for storing the total number)).

  Note that the size of each storage area is not limited to the above, and can be changed as appropriate.

  In the present embodiment, a specific winning combination group (left bell, middle bell in FIG. 9) having different degrees of advantage given to the player depending on the operation mode of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R among a plurality of combinations. , Right bell). When the result of the part lottery of the part lottery means 103 becomes the result of the specific winning group winning the specific winning group, the main CPU 61 identifies the AT game (the advantageous operation mode corresponding to the specific winning group). Perform special games that notify you as much as possible.

  In the game in the AT non-permissible state in which the AT game is not permitted, the game state setting means 100b determines whether to shift from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissible state based on the result of the role lottery by the hand lottery means 103, When the winning group “middle tier cherry”, “common bell 1”, and “common bell 2” are won, the transition from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissible state is decided, and the payout display control means 118 is the AT permissible state or the AT non-permissible state. Control is performed to turn on the advantageous zone lamp 47 that corresponds to the notification lamp that can specify whether or not the state is in effect, and the AT allowable state (the zone in the AT allowable state corresponds to the “advantageous zone”) is displayed.

  In addition, the payout display control means 118 determines the transition from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissible state in the lighting control of the advantageous zone lamp 47 (in the first embodiment, the winning group “middle tier cherry”, “common bell 1”). , "Common Bell 2"), and predetermined timings (in the first embodiment, corresponding to each of the winning group "Common Bell 2", "Middle Cherry", "Common Bell 1"). , The predetermined timings of the winning group “common bell 2”, “middle tier cherry”, and “common bell 1” are steps S205, S209, and S217 in the main process of FIG. 23.) The content (“1” in the first embodiment) indicating the lighting of the advantageous zone lamp 47 is set in the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data (corresponding to “lighting control data” of the present invention) used for controlling lighting and extinction of 47. Then, in the lamp process (step S435) in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 32, the advantageous zone lamp 47 is turned on based on the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data. Then, the payout display control means 118 wins the condition for ending the AT allowable state (in the first embodiment, wins the falling lottery after the AT remaining game number counter 654 becomes 0, and the AT continuous game number counter 655 becomes 0). On the condition that the advantageous section lamp 47 is satisfied, the advantageous section lamp lighting control data is set to the advantageous section lamp 47 at a predetermined timing (in the first embodiment, the timing is step S221 in the main process of FIG. 23). The content indicating turning off (“0” in the first embodiment) is set, and the advantageous period lamp 47 is turned off based on the advantageous period lamp lighting control data in the lamp process (step S435) in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 32.

  Further, the totalizing unit 114a sets the game as a game in an AT allowable state (advantageous section) at a predetermined timing (in the first embodiment, the timing is step S222 in the main process of FIG. 23). Contents indicating the advantageous interval counting flag (corresponding to the "counting flag" of the present invention) indicating whether to count or not when the next game is a game in the AT permissible state ("1" in the first embodiment). ), And sets the content (“0” in the first embodiment) indicating that counting is not performed when the next game is not a game in the AT permissible state. The details will be described in the later-described aggregation unit 114a.

  Details of the setting contents and setting timing of the advantageous period lamp lighting control data and the setting contents and setting timing of the advantageous period counting flag will be described in the main processing of FIG.

  A period from the next game of the game in which the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data used to control the lighting and extinction of the advantageous zone lamp 47 to the game in which the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data is set to the lighting content, that is, , AT allowable state is an advantageous section. In the game of the advantageous zone, when the number of advantageous zone games is totaled, the advantageous zone count flag is set to the content indicating the count, and the advantageous zone game number is the game during the period when the advantageous zone count flag is set to the content indicating the count. Is the number of games started (number of games). In addition, the aggregation means 114a counts a game (game) as the number of advantageous section games, provided that the advantageous section count flag is set to indicate the count. As a result, it becomes possible to collect information related to the AT allowable state and use this to perform a predetermined calculation.

  In the present embodiment, when the winning group “middle tier cherry”, “common bell 1”, and “common bell 2” are won, the AT period of, for example, 20 games is given without exception. A probability of 0 game (miss) may be given. In this case, when the winning group “middle tier cherry”, “common bell 1”, and “common bell 2” are won, the state shifts to the AT permissible state, and the payout display control means 118 ends the predetermined AT permissible state. Lighting control of the advantageous zone lamp 47 is performed until the condition is satisfied. The end condition of the AT permissible state is, for example, a 1/8 falling lottery is performed in each game except for a so-called rare winning game such as middle-tier cherry during the AT permissible state. It is configured to shift to the allowable state. At this time, when the falling lottery is won, the payout display control means 118 controls the turning off of the advantageous zone lamp 47 that is turned on. It should be noted that until the winning of the falling lottery, for example, it is determined whether or not the AT period is set by the AT lottery of each game. When this AT lottery is won, the initial number of games in the AT period is determined, and the AT period starts from the next game, for example. In the AT lottery, for example, the winning combination is one of the winning combinations 1-12. The fall lottery is not performed during the AT period, and the AT permitted state is shifted to the AT unpermitted state in the game in which the AT period has ended. At this time, the payout display control means 118 controls to turn off the advantageous section lamp 47 which is on. In this way, the AT game may not be played even in the AT permissive state, but even in such a case, the AT period may occur during the AT permissive state, as the advantageous section game number. To reflect. Even when the AT period given by the winning of the AT lottery ends, the AT allowable state may be maintained, and when the same falling lottery is won, the state may shift to the AT non-allowing state.

  However, regarding the total payout number, the bonus payout number, and the consecutive bonus payout number, the storage area for storing the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 has a ring buffer structure, and the first period P1 and the second period P2. , 3rd period P3, ..., 14th period P14, 15th period P15, 1st period P1, 2nd period P2, ... Repeating from 1st period P1 to 15th period P15 in order. The ring pointer is updated every 400 games, and the period value corresponding to the updated ring pointer is cleared and then updated every game. Further, regarding the total payout number, the bonus payout number, and the continuous bonus payout number, the cumulative PS and the total cumulative number are updated every 400 games. Further, the total number of games and the number of advantageous section games are updated every game. The total number of games is information that is updated regardless of the determination result of the symbol determination means (winning determination means) 109.

  The advantageous section ratio (total) is calculated for each game. The character ratio (6000 games), character ratio (total), continuous character ratio (6000 games), and continuous character ratio (total) are calculated every 400 games.

  The total payout number, the bonus payout number, the continuous bonus payout number, the total number of games, and the advantageous zone game number correspond to the aggregation items, and the advantageous zone ratio (cumulative) and the continuous role ratio (6000 games). , Character ratio (6000 games), continuous character ratio (total), and character ratio (total) correspond to the calculation items.

  The total number of games is information that is updated regardless of the determination result of the symbol determination means (winning determination means) 109, and the update of the information is performed by the aggregation means 114a described later.

  Further, the total number of paid-out PSs, the total number of payouts of the cumulative total, the number of payouts of the accessory, and the number of payouts of the continuous accessory are information aggregated by the establishment of a predetermined condition (every 400 games in this embodiment). The total number of payouts, the number of bonus payouts, and the number of continuous bonus payouts in each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 are totaled even if a predetermined condition is not satisfied (in each game in this embodiment). The total number of total games and the total number of advantageous section games are total information even if a predetermined condition is not satisfied (in this embodiment, each game). In the present embodiment, the predetermined condition is satisfied every 400 games, but the present invention is not limited to this.

  The advantageous section ratio (cumulative), continuous character ratio (6000 games), character ratio (6000 games), continuous character ratio (cumulative), and character ratio (cumulative) are calculation items as described above. The ratio display 69 is displayed in a predetermined order. In the present embodiment, in the predetermined order, the first is the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the second is the continuous character ratio (6000 games), the third is the character ratio (6000 games), and the fourth is the continuous character. The item ratio (cumulative), the fifth is the accessory ratio (cumulative).

  The continuous character ratio (6000 games), the character ratio (6000 games), the continuous character ratio (cumulative), and the character ratio (cumulative) are determined when predetermined conditions are satisfied (every 400 games in this embodiment). The advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is a calculation item that is calculated (in this embodiment, every game) even if a predetermined condition is not satisfied. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (every 400 games in this embodiment), an advantageous section ratio (cumulative), a continuous character ratio (6000 games), a character ratio (6000 games), a continuous character ratio ( The cumulative total) and the accessory ratio (total) are in a specific order related to the predetermined order displayed on the ratio display 69 (in the present embodiment, the reverse of the predetermined order displayed on the ratio display 69). Order). Further, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, only the calculation item in the first order in the predetermined order displayed in the ratio indicator 69 (in the present embodiment, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative)) is calculated. .. In the present embodiment, the predetermined condition is satisfied every 400 games, but the present invention is not limited to this. Further, although the specific order is opposite to the predetermined order displayed on the ratio display 69, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific order is displayed on the ratio display 69, for example. The order may be the same. Furthermore, the calculation item in the first order in the predetermined order is the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), but the invention is not limited to this.

(17) AT remaining game number counter 654
The AT remaining game number counter 654 in FIG. 7 is configured by an area preset in the RWM 65 and stores the number of remaining games in the AT game state.

(18) AT continuous game number counter 655
The AT continuous game number counter 655 in FIG. 7 is constituted by an area preset in the RWM 65 and stores the remaining maximum number of games in one AT permissible state.

(19) Game history monitoring means 114
The game history monitoring means 114 in FIG. 7 monitors the game history and functions as a totalizing means 114a and a computing means 114b.

a) aggregation means 114a
The totaling means 114a of FIG. 7 is after the rotation of all the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, 13R is stopped, and before the medal payout process is performed, regardless of the setting timing of the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data. In addition, various data are aggregated.

  The totaling unit 114a of FIG. 7 increments the stored value of the game number counter (400 counter) 652 by 1 for each game. Further, the counting means 114a determines whether or not the stored value of the game number counter 652 is equal to the set game number M (= 400) which is the set counting reference, and the stored value of the game number counter 652 is set to the set game number M ( = 400), the stored value of the game number counter 652 is cleared to 0 which is an initial value. The initial value of the stored value of the game number counter 652 is set to the set number of games M (= 400), and the number of games is counted by decrementing the stored value of the game number counter 652 by 1 for each game. Good.

  Further, the totalizing means 114a is after the rotation of all the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, 13R is stopped, regardless of the setting timing of the advantageous section lamp lighting control data, and the advantageous section lamp lighting in the game. After all the control data setting timing has passed and until the bet number setting for the next game can be set, after the game information totaling process for collecting various data, the advantageous section count Performs flag setting processing. In the process of setting the advantageous zone counting flag, the advantageous zone counting flag is set to the content indicating the count ("1" in the first embodiment) when the next game is a game in the AT permissible state, and the next game. Is set to the content (“0” in the first embodiment) indicating that the game is not counted when the game is not in the AT allowed state. In the first embodiment, the process of setting the advantageous period counting flag is performed by setting the advantageous period lamp lighting control data set at the time of the process as the advantageous period counting flag. One game starts from the setting of the bet number of medals until it becomes possible to set the bet number of medals for the next game. That is, one game is started from the start of the determination process of step S201 of the main process of FIG. 23 to the process of steps S202 to S222 and immediately before the determination process of step S201 is performed.

  Further, the totalizing unit 114a totals the storage contents of the game information storage unit 653 shown in FIG. In the present specification, claims, drawings, etc., “aggregate” means “collecting numbers and summing”, “cumulating numbers”, and “collecting numbers so far and summing up”. Added value or new value added to the value accumulated so far ”and the like.

  Specifically, the totaling unit 114a is necessary for the values of the total payout number, the bonus payout number, and the continuous bonus payout number for each game, in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15. The value of the total payout number, the bonus payout number, and the continuous bonus payout number for the corresponding period is updated by adding the number of winning prizes. Further, the aggregating means 114a updates the value of the total number of games for each game by incrementing by 1, and at the same time, the value of the total number of advantageous section games is indicated by the advantageous section count flag. It is updated by incrementing it by 1.

  Furthermore, the totaling unit 114a calculates the cumulative total of the total payout numbers from the first period P1 to the 15th period P15 for every 400 games, stores the cumulative value in the total payout number of cumulative PS, and from the first period P1. Calculate the cumulative number of bonus character payouts up to the 15th period P15, store the cumulative value in the cumulative PS character payout number, and calculate the cumulative number of consecutive bonus payout numbers from the 1st period P1 to the 15th period P15. Then, the cumulative value is stored in the cumulative number of consecutive accessory payouts of PS. In addition, the totalizing means 114a adds the total payout amount in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the 15th period P15 to the total cumulative total payout amount for every 400 games, thereby making the total cumulative total payout. The total number of bonus character payouts is updated by updating the number of tokens and adding the number of bonus payouts of the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 to the total cumulative number of bonus payouts. , The total cumulative number of consecutive accessory payouts is updated by adding the number of consecutive accessory payouts for the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first term P1 to the fifteenth term P15 to the total cumulative number of consecutive accessory payouts.

  The counting unit 114a updates the stored contents of the game information storage unit 653 performed every 400 games after the number of games after the previous update of the ring pointer reaches 400, and then updates the ring pointer, and the first term The values of the total payout number, the bonus payout number, and the continuous bonus payout number in the period corresponding to the updated ring pointer from P1 to the 15th period P15 are cleared to 0. The ring pointer is updated as in the first period P1, the second period P2, the third period P3, ..., The 14th period P14, the 15th period P15, the first period P1, the second period P2 ,. The first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 are sequentially repeated.

b) computing means 114b
The calculating means 114b of FIG. 7 calculates the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) for each game based on the stored contents of FIG. 10, and determines the continuous character ratio (6000 games), the character ratio (6000 games), and the continuous character ratio. The (total) and the accessory ratio (total) are calculated for every 400 games.

  In the calculation of the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the ratio (percentage) (%) of the total cumulative number of advantageous section games to the total cumulative number of games is calculated. Further, in the calculation of the continuous character ratio (6000 games), the ratio (percentage) (%) of the cumulative PS payout number of the continuous PS to the total payout number of the cumulative PS is calculated to calculate the ratio of the character ratio (6000 games). In the calculation, the ratio (percentage) (%) of the cumulative PS number of the payout number of the accessory to the total payout number of the cumulative PS is calculated. Furthermore, in the calculation of the continuous character ratio (cumulative), the ratio (percentage) (%) of the total cumulative number of continuous character payouts to the total total number of coins paid out is calculated, and in the calculation of the character ratio (total) , Calculate the ratio (percentage) (%) of the total cumulative total of the number of accessory payouts to the total total total number of payouts.

(20) Display control means 115
The display control means 115 in FIG. 7 performs display control on the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 to perform display based on FIGS. 12, 13, and 14 and display control to perform display based on FIG.

  First, the correspondence relationship between a plurality of lightable portions of the 7-segment display and 1-byte (8-bit) display data will be described with reference to FIG.

  The 7-segment display has 8 possible lighting points A, B, C, D, E, F, G, DP, and 8 possible lighting points A, B, C, D, E, F, G, DP. Correspond to the 0th bit, the 1st bit, the 2nd bit, the 3rd bit, the 4th bit, the 5th bit, the 6th bit, and the 7th bit of 1-byte (8-bit) display data, respectively. When the value is 0, it is off, and when it is 1, it is on. The least significant bit is described as the 0th bit, and the least significant byte is described as the 1st byte.

  For example, if the value of 1 byte is $ FF (hexadecimal notation), that is, 11111111 (binary notation), all of the lightable points A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP are Light. If the value of 1 byte is $ 40 (hexadecimal notation), that is, 01000000 (binary notation), it is possible to light one of the possible lighting locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, DP. Only the point G lights up.

  The display control means 115 is capable of lighting a part of all possible lighting portions of the ratio indicator 69 (in the present embodiment, each of the thousands, tens and ones of the ratio indicator 69 can be illuminated). Predetermined game inspection information out of the five types of game inspection information is displayed by using other lightable points except the point DP (dot portion), and the display target of the ratio indicator 69 is changed to 5 at regular intervals. By sequentially changing to another game inspection information of the types of game inspection information, the five types of game inspection information are periodically displayed using the other lightable portions of the ratio indicator 69. Then, the display control means 115 displays at least one of the five types of game inspection information during the display control of the five types of game inspection information using the other lightable portions of the ratio indicator 69. In the case of an abnormal state, a predetermined abnormality notification display is performed using the above-mentioned part of the ratio indicator 69 where the lighting is possible. However, in the present embodiment, the game inspection information includes the inspection data (for example, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative)) obtained by the calculation unit 114b and the information for identifying the inspection data. In the present embodiment, the display mode according to the display method of FIGS. 12 to 14 is referred to as “normal display mode”, and the display control of this normal display mode is referred to as “normal display control”.

  Display contents in the normal display control by the display control unit 115 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 12 to 14.

  First, the display contents of the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 related to the game inspection information under the normal display control will be described with reference to FIG. However, the display content of the 7-segment display column in FIG. 12 is a specific display example of the ratio indicator 69, and the percentage (%) is 50 (%), and none of the five types of game inspection information is in an abnormal state. This is the case.

  The ratio display 69 has (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative), (2) continuous character ratio (6000 games), (3) character ratio (6000 games), (4) as display items of the game inspection information. ) There are continuous accessory ratios (cumulative) and (5) accessory ratios (cumulative), which are lit at the thousands, tens and ones of the ratio indicator 69 according to the display method shown in FIG. It is displayed by using the other possible lighting spots except the possible spot DP (dot portion). However, the ratio display numbers in FIG. 12 indicate the display order.

  Specifically, in (1) Advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the abbreviation “7A” indicating “advantageous section ratio (cumulative)” in the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) of the ratio indicator 69. Is displayed, and the number of advantageous section games in the cumulative game after the installation in the last two digits (the tens digit and the ones digit) of the ratio display 69 and the RWM clear (the total number of advantageous section games in FIG. 10) Of the total number of games in the cumulative game (total total number of games in FIG. 10), a two-digit effective numerical value of a ratio (percentage) (%) is displayed.

  In the case of (2) continuous character ratio (6000 games), the abbreviation "6b" indicating "continuous character ratio (6000 games)" is displayed in the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) of the ratio indicator 69. Is displayed, and the last two digits (the tens digit and the ones digit) of the ratio display 69 are the latest of the number of consecutive bonus payouts in the 6000 game (the number of consecutive bonus payouts in the cumulative PS in FIG. 10). A two-digit effective numerical value of a ratio (percentage) (%) to the total payout number in the 6000 game (total payout number of cumulative PS in FIG. 10) is displayed.

  Further, in (3) character ratio (6000 games), the abbreviation “7b” indicating “character ratio (6000 games)” is displayed in the upper 2-digit segment (thousands and hundreds) of the ratio display 69. The total number of character payouts in the most recent 6000 games of the number of character payouts in the most recent 6000 games (the number of character payouts of cumulative PS in FIG. 10) displayed in the lower two digits (the tens digit and the ones digit) of the ratio display 69. A two-digit effective numerical value of a ratio (percentage) (%) with respect to the payout number (total payout number of cumulative PS in FIG. 10) is displayed.

  Furthermore, in (4) continuous character ratio (cumulative), the abbreviation "6c" indicating "continuous character ratio (cumulative)" is displayed in the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) of the ratio indicator 69. The number of consecutive character payouts in the cumulative game after being displayed in the lower two digits (the tens digit and the ones digit) of the ratio display 69 or after clearing the RWM (the total cumulative number of consecutive character payouts in FIG. 10). ) Is displayed as a 2-digit effective numerical value of a ratio (percentage) (%) with respect to the total payout number (total payout number of the total accumulation in FIG. 10) in the cumulative game after installation or after RWM clear.

  Further, in (5) accessory ratio (cumulative), an abbreviation "7c" indicating "accompaniment ratio (cumulative)" is displayed in the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) segment of the ratio indicator 69. Installation of the number of character payouts (total cumulative number of character payouts in FIG. 10) in the cumulative game after installation in the lower two digits (the tens digit and the ones digit) of the ratio display 69 or after RWM clear. A two-digit effective numerical value of the ratio (percentage) (%) to the total payout number (total payout number of the total accumulation in FIG. 10) in the cumulative game after or after RWM clear is displayed.

  However, when the percentage is 100 (%), it is not possible to display in the lower two digits (the tens digit and the ones digit) of the ratio indicator 69, and therefore in the present embodiment, the lower digits of the ratio indicator 69 are displayed. 99 (%) is displayed in a 2-digit segment (the tens digit and the ones digit).

  However, (1) advantageous zone ratio (cumulative), (2) continuous role ratio (6000 games), (3) role ratio (6000 games), (4) continuous role ratio (cumulative), (5) roles In the object ratio (cumulative), as shown in the column of 7-segment display in FIG. 12, the 100th possible lighting portion DP is turned on. By turning on the turnable portion DP of the hundreds, it becomes easy to understand the boundary between the identification segment and the ratio segment when the game inspection information is not in an abnormal state.

  These (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative), (2) continuous role ratio (6000 games), (3) role ratio (6000 games), (4) continuous role ratio (cumulative), (5) roles The material ratio (cumulative) is displayed in a predetermined order. Specifically, (1) the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is displayed for a certain period. Subsequently, (2) continuous character ratio (6000 games) is displayed for a certain period, and subsequently (3) character ratio (6000 games) is displayed for a certain period. Further, subsequently, (4) continuous character ratio (cumulative) is displayed for a certain period, and subsequently (5) character effect ratio (total) is displayed for a certain period.

  Then, the game inspection information of these display items (1) to (5) is sequentially and repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. At this time, for example, when the number of games has not reached 6000, in (2) and (3), the upper 2-digit segment is displayed in blinking. Also, for example, when the number of games has not reached 175,000, the high-order two-digit segment is displayed blinking in (1), (4), and (5). Further, in (1) to (5), the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the continuous character ratio (6000 games), the character ratio (6000 games), the continuous character ratio (cumulative), and the character ratio (cumulative) respectively. If the value is equal to or greater than a value (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as a “ratio specified value”) that is predetermined corresponding to, the lower two-digit segment is displayed in blinking.

  However, when the power is turned off and then turned on again, the display is performed from (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative) regardless of the display item when the power is turned off. For example, if the power is turned off while (3) the character ratio (6000 games) is displayed, (1) the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is displayed when the power is turned on again.

  Note that the abbreviations are examples and are not limited to those shown in FIG. 12, and display items may be different from each other.

  Next, the display content of the advantageous zone ratio (cumulative) of the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 related to the game inspection information under the normal display control in the model having no advantageous zone will be described with reference to FIG. However, the display content of the column of 7-segment display in FIG. 13 is a specific display example of the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) in a model having no advantageous section, and when none of the five types of game inspection information is in an abnormal state. is there.

  As shown in the 7-segment display column of FIG. 13, by using the lightable portions other than the lightable portions DP (dot portions) of the thousands, tens and ones of the ratio indicator 69, respectively. , The abbreviation “7A” indicating “advantageous section ratio (cumulative)” is displayed in the segment of the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) of the ratio display 69, and the lower two digits of the ratio display 69 (tenths). "---" (only the lightable point G is lit) is displayed in the segment of the first place and the first place. However, as in the case of (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative) of FIG. 12, in the case of (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative) of FIG. ing.

  Finally, with reference to FIG. 14, the display contents of the ratio indicator 69 related to the display for the predetermined abnormality notification during the normal display control will be described. However, the display content of the 7-segment display column in FIG. 14B is a specific display example of the ratio display 69.

  As the abnormal state of the five kinds of game inspection information, the ratio calculated by the calculation means 114b (in the present embodiment, advantageous zone ratio (cumulative), continuous character ratio (6000 games), character ratio (6000 games), continuous If the value of the character ratio (cumulative), the character ratio (cumulative) is equal to or greater than the ratio specified value, the total number of games (total of FIG. 10) after installation or after clearing the RWM used to calculate the advantageous zone ratio (cumulative) The value stored in the storage area corresponding to the total number of total games) may be less than 175,000.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, when at least one ratio of ratio display numbers 3 (continuous character ratio (cumulative)) and 4 (character ratio (cumulative)) is equal to or higher than the ratio specified value, the ratio display The one-digit lightable portion DP (dot portion) of the container 69 blinks. In addition, the ratio display number 0 (advantageous section ratio (cumulative)), 1 (continuous character ratio (6000 games)), 2 (character ratio (6000 games)), 3 (continuous character ratio (total)), 4 When at least one ratio of (characteristic ratio (cumulative)) is equal to or higher than the ratio specified value, the tens place possible lighting portion DP (dot portion) of the ratio indicator 69 blinks. Furthermore, when the total number of games after installation or after clearing the RWM is less than 175,000, the lit place DP (dot portion) of the thousands digit of the ratio display 69 blinks.

  As shown in FIG. 14B, when at least one of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 has a ratio specified value or more and the total number of games is 175000 or more, a part of the ratio indicator 69 is turned on. The gaming inspection information is displayed by using other lightable points other than the lightable points, and one or tens digit of each of the above-mentioned some lightable points of the ratio indicator 69 is lightable DP ( The dot portion) blinks, and the lit place DP (dot portion) of the tens place of the above-mentioned part of the possible lighting portions of the ratio indicator 69 is turned off. In this case, the ratio display numbers 0 to 2 may or may not have a ratio specified value or more.

  If at least one of the ratio display numbers 0 to 2 is equal to or higher than the ratio specified value, and any of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 is less than the ratio specified value, and the total number of games is 175000 or more, the ratio display is displayed. The gaming inspection information is displayed by using other lightable portions other than the above partial lightable portions of the device 69, and the tens digit of the above part of the ratio indicator 69 is illuminated. The feasible portion DP (dot portion) blinks, and the one-third place and the thousandth place littable portion DP (dot portion) of the above-mentioned part of the lightable portions of the ratio indicator 69 are turned off.

  Further, if any of the ratio display numbers 0 to 4 is less than the ratio specified value and the total number of games is less than 175000, other ratios of the ratio indicator 69, which can be lighted, are excluded. While displaying the game inspection information by using, the lit-up place DP (dot portion) of the tens place of the above-mentioned part of the lit-up place of the ratio display 69 blinks, and the above-mentioned one of the ratio display 69 is displayed. The lightable portions DP (dot portions) of the ones and the tens of the lightable portions of the part are turned off.

  When at least one of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 is equal to or higher than the ratio specified value and the total number of games is less than 175000, other lightable parts except the above part of the ratio indicator 69 which can be lighted. While displaying the game inspection information using, the one-, ten-, and thousand-third littable portions DP (dot portions) of the above-mentioned some littable portions of the ratio indicator 69 blink. To do. In this case, the ratio display numbers 0 to 2 may or may not have a ratio specified value or more.

  Further, when at least one ratio of the ratio display numbers 0 to 2 is equal to or higher than the ratio specified value, and any ratio of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 is less than the ratio specified value, and the total number of games is less than 175000, the ratio display The gaming inspection information is displayed by using other lightable portions except the above-mentioned some lightable portions of the device 69, and the tens and thousandths of the above-mentioned some lightable portions of the ratio indicator 69 are displayed. The lightable portion DP (dot portion) of each of the three positions is blinked, and the one lightable portion DP (dot portion) of the above-mentioned some lightable portions of the ratio indicator 69 is turned off.

  Further, when any of the ratio display numbers 0 to 4 is less than the ratio specified value, and the total number of games is 175000 or more, the other possible lightable parts of the ratio indicator 69 excluding the above part of the lightable parts are set. The gaming inspection information is displayed by using the ratio indicator 69, and the one-, ten-, and thousands-third littable portions DP (dot portions) of the above-mentioned some littable portions are turned off. ..

  Note that, in the present embodiment, considering that the display of the ratio indicator 69 has a portion where blinking control is performed according to an abnormal state, the specific example of FIG. 14B shows the lighting during blinking control for that portion. This is the illustration inside.

  Next, the display content of the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 when an RWM error occurs will be described with reference to FIG. However, the display content of the 7-segment display column in FIG. 15 is a specific display example of the ratio display 69 when an RWM error occurs.

  As shown in the column of 7-segment display in FIG. 15, when a RWM error occurs, all the lightable points A and B are displayed at each of the thousands, hundreds, tens and ones of the ratio indicator 69. , C, D, E, F, G, DP are lit. In the present embodiment, the display mode according to the display method of FIG. 15 is called a special display mode, and the display control of this special display mode is called “special display control”.

  Comparing the display contents of the 7-segment display column of FIG. 15 with the display contents of the 7-segment display column of FIGS. 12, 13, and 14, the special display control when the RWM error of FIG. , The gaming inspection information displayed by the normal display control of FIGS. 13 and 14 is not displayed, and all the lightable portions of the ratio indicator 69 are turned on. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that the RWM error has occurred by the display of the ratio display 69 in which all the lightable portions of the ratio display 69 are turned on without displaying the game inspection information.

(21) Credit display control means 116
The credit display control means 116 in FIG. 7 performs display control for displaying the accumulated number of medals on the credit display unit 45.

(22) Cancel control means 117
The cancel control means 117 in FIG. 7 does not drive the cancel coil using an electromagnet, for example, when the number of stored medals reaches the maximum number of stored medals or during a game, and thus the rail portion of the medal selector 48 does not operate. The medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 25 are discharged to the medal payout opening 39 regardless of whether they are regular or irregular. In addition, in cases other than the above, the cancel coil using the electromagnet is driven to operate the rail portion of the medal selector 48, whereby it is determined whether or not the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 25 is authentic. Only regular medals are guided to the hopper unit 43.

(23) Payout display control means 118
The payout display control unit 118 in FIG. 7 can specify the payout display unit 46 with (1) payout number display control for displaying the payout number via the payout control unit 110, and (2) the type of a specific event (error). Error code display control for displaying special information (error code) that is special information is switched. In addition, the payout display control means 118 displays that it is an advantageous section by lighting the tens digit, the ones digit, or both dots (corresponding to the lightable point DP) of the payout indicator 46, and the tens digit. Display control is performed to display that there is no advantageous zone by turning off the dots and the ones digit.

  However, the payout display control means 118 determines to shift from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissible state (in the first embodiment, the winning group “middle cherry”, “common bell 1”, “common bell 2” is won. ), A predetermined timing corresponding to each of the winning group “common bell 2”, “middle tier cherry”, and “common bell 1” (in the first embodiment, the winning group “common bell 2”). , "Middle tier cherry" and "common bell 1" are predetermined timings in steps S205, S209, and S217 in the main processing of FIG. 23.) and are used for controlling turning on and off of the advantageous zone lamp 47. The advantageous section lamp lighting control data to be set is set with a content (“1” in the first embodiment) indicating that the advantageous section lamp 47 is lit, and the advantageous section lamp is lit in the lamp processing (step S435) in the timer interrupt processing of FIG. The advantageous zone lamp 47 is turned on based on the control data. Then, the payout display control means 118 wins the condition for ending the AT allowable state (in the first embodiment, wins the falling lottery after the AT remaining game number counter 654 becomes 0, and the AT continuous game number counter 655 becomes 0). On the condition that the advantageous section lamp 47 is satisfied, the advantageous section lamp lighting control data is set to the advantageous section lamp 47 at a predetermined timing (in the first embodiment, the timing is step S221 in the main process of FIG. 23). The content indicating turning off (“0” in the first embodiment) is set, and the advantageous period lamp 47 is turned off based on the advantageous period lamp lighting control data in the lamp process (step S435) in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 32.

  Here, the game stopping means 113 does not stop the game (error processing) until a stop operation is performed on the final reel (the reel that is finally stopped among the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R). , The game is stopped (error processing) at a predetermined timing after the stop operation for the final reel is performed (specifically, after the slip has occurred after the stop operation for the final reel and after the four-phase excitation by the stepping motor). I do. At the same time, the payout display control means 118 performs display control for displaying special information (error code) on the payout display 46.

  That is, the game stopping means 113 does not stop the game (error processing) until a stop operation is performed on the reel (final reel) that is finally stopped among the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R. Then, the game stop means 113 stops the game (error processing) at a predetermined timing after the stop operation for the final reel is performed, and the payout display control means 118 causes the payout display device 46 to display special information (error code). Display control is performed to display. However, this does not apply to the E5 error.

  Further, when an error has occurred, a reset switch (not shown, but the setting change button 50c of the operation box 50 also serves as the reset switch) is operated, whereby the game stop means 113 is operated. The cancellation condition for canceling the game stop (error processing) is satisfied. In this case, the game stopping means 113 releases the game stop by the game stopping means 113 and makes the progress of the game possible. Further, the payout display control means 118 stops the display of the special information (error code display) performed on the payout display 46. However, in the case of the RWM error (E4 error), the RWM error (E4 error) is canceled by changing the setting.

  Here, the display content of the payout indicator 46 related to the error will be described with reference to FIG.

  The error contents displayed on the payout display device 46 are "game medal error", "payout game medal error", "payout failure error", "payout game medal run-out error", "RWM error", "reel error", " "Overflow error", "Game medal payout device connection error", and "Sensor error".

  The game medal error (error code E0) is a condition in which medals are accumulated or pass the insertion sensor 53 of the medal selector 48 in an abnormal state, and 7-segment display (payout display) The display contents of the (vessel) column are displayed on the payout indicator 46. Further, the payout game medal error (error code E1) indicates that the medal clogging has occurred at the payout opening of the hopper unit 43, and the display content of the 7-segment display (payout display) column is the payout display 46. Displayed in. Further, in the payout failure error (error code E2), the payout sensor 54 is in the ON state except when the medal is paid out, and the display content of the 7-segment display (payout display) column is the payout display 46. Displayed in. The payout game medal run-out error (error code E3) indicates that the medals in the hopper unit 43 are empty, that is, the so-called hopper empty state has occurred, and the 7-segment display (payout display) column display The content is displayed on the payout display device 46.

  The RWM error (error code E4) is an RWM (Read Write Memory) read / write memory in which a backup failure of a RAM (Random Access Memory) is also performed. The display content of the display (payout display) column is displayed on the payout display 46.

  The reel error (error code E5) is a spinning drum (reel) position detection error (position detection error by the left / middle / right position sensors 55L, 55M, 55R), and the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R. Position detection of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R due to power failure during stop processing of the left / center / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R This is a state in which an error has occurred, and the display contents of the 7-segment display (payout display) column are displayed on the payout display 46. An overflow error (error code E6) indicates that the auxiliary tank provided next to the hopper unit 43 is full of medals, and the content displayed in the 7-segment display (payout display) column is the payout. It is displayed on the display 46. Furthermore, the game medal payout device connection error (error code E7) occurs when the payout sensor 54 of the hopper unit 43 is defective and the hopper unit 43 is out of the normal position. Yes, the display content of the 7-segment display (payout display) column is displayed on the payout display 46. Further, the sensor error (error code EA) is a state where abnormal passage of medals occurs, and when the insertion sensor 53 for detecting insertion of medals detects passage of medals in a state where insertion of medals is impossible. The display content of the 7-segment display (payout display device) column is displayed on the payout display device 46.

  Among these errors, in the game medal error (error code E0), the payout failure error (error code E2), the reel error (error code E5), and the sensor error (error code EA), the left / middle / right reel 13L, This is an error that can be detected even when at least one of 13M and 13R is rotating.

(Sub control board)
Next, the configuration of the sub control board 73 will be described in detail. The sub control board 73 receives a command transmitted from the main control board 63, and performs an effect according to the operation or state of the main control board 63. As shown in FIG. 7, the sub-control board 73 has various functions realized by executing a program stored in the memory 75 and various functions realized by controlling hardware. There is.

(1) Sub-control command receiving means 201
The sub-control command receiving means 201 of FIG. 7 receives a command including various data transmitted by the sub-control command transmitting means 111 of the main control board 63 (main CPU 61) as predetermined information. The sub control command receiving unit 201 receives a command transmitted from the main control board 63, and when receiving the command, notifies the respective functions of the sub control board 73 according to the type of the command.

(2) Effect content determination means 202
The effect content determination means 202 of FIG. 7 is for determining the effect content in accordance with the command received by the sub-control command reception means 201. Specifically, a moving image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 is determined from the effect patterns preset in accordance with the progress of the game and the result of the lottery of the lottery means 103, and the speakers 31L and 31R are used. Effects such as music to be played and voice to be played, and light sources of the upper lamp unit 33 and the lower lamp units 37L and 37R blinking all at once or individually are determined.

  Then, if the received command corresponds to the received command during the AT period and the type of the winning group (bell group) that has been won can be identified, the player corresponding to the type of the winning group. The effect contents are determined so that the player can know the advantageous operation mode if the received command does not correspond to the AT command during the AT period. For example, when the “No. 1” command shown in FIG. 9 is received according to the winning lottery result, it is not during the AT period, so it can be understood that one of the winning groups of the “bell group” has been won. Select one effect from the group of effects that you do not know whether you have won the "left bell," "middle bell," or "right bell." In addition, when the command of “No. 2” shown in FIG. 9 is received, one effect is selected from the effects indicating that the “left bell” has been won and the effect that prompts the user to operate the left stop switch 21L first. Select. When the "3rd" and "4th" commands shown in FIG. 9 are received, the effect contents are similarly determined.

  In addition, when the production content determination unit 202 receives the commands of "No. 5" to "No. 8" shown in FIG. 9, similarly, the production content determining unit 202 selects one from the production groups that suggest the possibility of winning each winning combination group. Select the production of. Furthermore, when receiving the command of "0", similarly, one effect is selected from the effect group corresponding to the loss so as not to spoil the expectation of the player.

  When the received command is a command indicating the AT non-permissible state and "No. 10" (winning combination group "common bell 2"), the effect content determination means 202 shifts from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissible state. Is determined to be performed (hereinafter, referred to as "AT permissible transition determination production") is determined to be performed at a timing after the winning combination lottery, and the production display control unit 203 is provided with the AT permissible transition determination production. That is, the effect display control means 203 performs the AT allowable transition determination effect at the timing after the winning combination lottery. When the received command is a command indicating the AT non-permissible state and "No. 5" (winning combination group "middle-tier cherry"), the effect content determination means 202 causes the AT permissible transition determination effect to be the first stop switch stop. It is decided to be performed at a timing after the operation, and after the determination is made, the effect display control means 203 is allowed to perform the AT permissible transition determination effect at the timing when the command indicating the stop operation of any of the stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R is first received. , And the effect display control means 203 performs the AT allowable transition determination effect at the timing after the first stop operation. Further, when the received command is a command indicating the AT non-permissible state and "9" (winning combination group "common bell 1"), the effect content determination means 202 sets the AT permissible transition determination effect to all reels 13L and 13M. , 13R is determined to be performed at the timing after the stop, and after the determination, all the commands indicating the stop of the reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are received, and the production display control unit 203 is instructed to perform the AT allowable transition determination production. Then, the effect display control means 203 performs the AT allowable transition determination effect at the timing after the stop of all the reels 13L, 13M, 13R. It is not always necessary to perform the AT permissible transition determination effect, and for example, the pattern in which the advantageous section lamp 47 is turned on after all reels are stopped is determined to be the AT permissible transition determination as compared with other patterns in which the advantageous section lamp 47 is turned on. The effect may be implemented at a low implementation rate, or may be implemented in another pattern but not implemented in the pattern.

  As the effect content, for example, the effect content determining unit 202 displays the operation sequence of each of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R on the liquid crystal display 27, or the left / middle / right stop by the speakers 31L, 31R. The operation order of each of the stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R is notified by voice, or the lamps provided on each of the stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are blinked in a predetermined order. Or the backlight provided on each of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R is blinked in a predetermined order to notify the operation sequence of each of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R. There are production contents such as.

  Then, the effect content determination unit 202 transmits a signal including data relating to the determined effect content to the effect display control unit 203 and the sound control unit 204 described below.

(3) Effect display control means 203
The effect display control means 203 of FIG. 7 displays a moving image on the liquid crystal display 27 based on the data included in the signal transmitted from the effect content determination means 202, and the upper lamp part 33 and the lower lamp parts 37L and 37R. Performs effects such as flashing all light sources simultaneously or individually.

(4) Voice control means 204
The voice control unit 204 in FIG. 7 executes a production such as playing music or outputting a voice from the speakers 31L and 31R based on the data included in the signal transmitted from the production content determining unit 202.

(motion)
Next, the operation of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 51. In the present embodiment, when the “bell group” (any one of “left bell”, “middle bell”, and “right bell”) is won during the AT period (the AT period flag is ON), it is won. The sub-control board 73 performs the effect of notifying the operation order of the stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R that are advantageous to the player corresponding to the winning combination group, and the respective stop switches 21L, 21M, which are advantageous to the player. The operation order of 21R is notified.

  In the following description, various functions and means described above and other functions realized by the main CPU 61 of the main control board 63 and the sub CPU 71 of the sub control board 73 executing various programs (detailed description is omitted). This is the process executed by and. Further, the process of setting various flags to be ON (ON) or OFF (OFF) and setting a value to each flag, which is executed in the following process, is a well-known technique. Detailed description is omitted.

1. Power-on process The power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. However, the power-on process is a process executed by the main CPU 61.

  The power-on process shown in FIG. 17 is a process executed when the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on. When the power switch 50a of the slot machine 1 is turned on, whether or not the power-off signal is on. Is determined (step S1), and when the power interruption signal is determined to be ON (YES in step S1), the process stands by, and when the power interruption signal is determined to be OFF (NO in step S1). ), The RWM 65 is accessible (step S2). Then, the RWM backup failure determination processing, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 18, is performed (step S3). Subsequently, a power-on initialization process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 19, is performed (step S4).

  Then, it is determined whether the door sensor 58 is in the ON state (the front door 5 is in the closed state) (step S5). Then, when it is determined that the door sensor 58 is in the ON state (the front door 5 is in the closed state) (YES in step S5), the process proceeds to step S8.

  In the determination process of step S5, when it is determined that the door sensor 58 is not in the ON state (the front door 5 is closed), that is, the front door 5 is in the open state (NO in step S5), the setting change key switch 50b is operated. Then, it is determined whether or not it is in the ON state (step S6). Then, when it is determined that the setting change key switch 50b is not in the ON state (NO in step S6), the process proceeds to step S8. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting change key switch 50b is in the ON state (YES in step S6), the setting change process described in detail later with reference to FIG. 21 is performed (step S7). As described above, the slot machine 1 does not proceed to the setting change processing of step S7 unless the front door 5 is open and the setting change key switch 50b is in the ON state in order to improve safety as a countermeasure against fraud. It is like this.

  In step S8, it is determined whether or not the result of the RWM backup defect determination processing in step S3 is defective. This determination processing is to determine the RWM backup failure when the RWM backup failure is set in step S37 of FIG. 18 described later.

  When it is determined that the backup state of the RWM is bad (YES in step S8), error processing (specifically, an E4 error) described later with reference to FIG. 22 is performed (step S9). ). Then, the power-on process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the backup state of the RWM is not bad (NO in step S8), it is determined whether any of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M and 13R is rotating (step). S10). When it is determined that none of the left / center / right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (NO in step S10), the process proceeds to step S12. On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R is rotating (YES in step S10), the restart state of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R is set. (Step S11), the process proceeds to step S12. Specifically, the process of returning the rotating reel of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, 13R to the state before the power interruption is performed. When the power is turned on, settings are made so that the current states of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R can be restored.

  In step S12, a sensor error determination process (EA error), which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 20, is performed. Then, the power-on process ends.

1.1. RWM Backup Defect Determination Process The RWM backup defect determination process (step S3) of FIG. 17 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The specific event detection means 112 determines the checksum value (step S31). This is to determine whether or not the checksum value held at the time of power interruption matches. If they do not match, it is determined that the backup is defective. The checksum value is obtained by regarding the data stored in the predetermined area of the RWM value as a sequence of integer values, obtaining the sum, and using the remainder divided by a predetermined constant as the inspection data.

  The specific event detection means 112 determines the power failure flag (step S32). This is a value in which a predetermined predetermined value is stored at the time of power failure, and if it is other than the predetermined value, it is determined that the power is in an abnormal state.

  The specific event detection means 112 determines the stack pointer (step S33). It determines the range of the stack pointer at the time of power failure, holds the address of the most recently referenced position, and if this address is outside the range of the predetermined address, it is in an abnormal state. Is determined as.

  The specific event detection means 112 determines the set value (step S34). Specifically, it is to determine whether or not the set value is within the range of 1 to 6. If it is out of the range, it is determined as an abnormal state.

  The specific event detection means 112 determines the internal winning information higher rank (step S35). This is to determine whether or not the bonus information of the winning information (lottery information) in the winning combination lottery is within the range of predetermined upper data. When the bonus information of the winning information (lottery information) of the winning combination lottery is out of the range of the predetermined upper data, it is determined as an abnormal state.

  The specific event detection means 112 determines whether the backup of the RWM is defective (step S36). Based on the determination results of steps S31 to S35, it is determined whether or not the state is abnormal, that is, whether or not the state is defective. If it is determined that the state is not in a bad state (NO in step S36), the process returns to the process procedure of the power-on process of FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the state is defective (YES in step S36), the specific event detection unit 112 sets the RWM backup defect (step S37). Then, the specific event detecting means 112 clears all the contents of the RWM 65 regarding the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 (step S38). Here, the contents to be cleared are, for example, the total payout number, the bonus payout number, and the continuous bonus payout number for each of the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15, the cumulative PS, and the total cumulative number of FIG. In addition, the total number of total games and the number of advantageous section games. Further, the cumulative PS of FIG. 10 and the total cumulative total of the character ratios and the continuous character ratios. Further, it is the ratio of the total advantageous intervals in FIG. In addition, it is the setting contents of the display data of the thousands, hundreds, tens and ones of the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69. Further, a 6000 arrival flag, a total game number upper limit flag, and a total payout upper limit flag, which will be described later. Then, the procedure returns to the processing procedure of the power-on processing of FIG.

1.2. Power-on Initial Setting Process The power-on initial setting process (step S4) of FIG. 17 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The display control means 115 clears the ratio display number and sets the value to 0 (step S51). Thus, when the power is turned on, (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative), which is a display item corresponding to the ratio display number 0, is displayed on the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69.

  Then, the display control means 115 clears the ratio blinking flag to set the value to 0 (step S52). As a result, a part of the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 that can be lighted (in the present embodiment, the lightable parts DP (dot portions) of each of the ones digit, the tens digit, and the thousands digit) is excluded. When blinking the display contents of the possible lighting portions of, the lighting starts when the power is turned on.

  Further subsequently, the display control means 115 clears the dot lighting flag to set the value to 0 (step S53). As a result, the display contents of a part of the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 that can be lighted (in the present embodiment, the lightable parts DP (dot parts) of each of the ones digit, the tens digit, and the thousands digit). When blinking is displayed, it will start from lighting when the power is turned on.

  Further subsequently, the display control means 115 sets the display switching timer (step S54). When a value corresponding to, for example, 5 seconds is set in the display switching timer, the display items (1) to (5) (see FIG. 12) displayed on the ratio display 69 are switched every 5 seconds. ..

  Further subsequently, the display control means 115 sets a ratio blinking timer (step S55). When the ratio blinking timer is set to a value corresponding to 0.3 seconds, for example, lighting and extinguishing are switched every 0.3 seconds.

  Further subsequently, the display control means 115 sets the dot blinking timer (step S56). Then, the procedure returns to the processing procedure of the power-on processing of FIG. When the dot blinking timer is set to a value corresponding to, for example, 0.1 seconds, lighting and extinction are switched every 0.1 seconds. However, in the present embodiment, the dot blinking timer is set to a value smaller than the value set in the ratio blinking timer. As a result, the blinking interval of the above-mentioned part of the ratio display 69 which can be turned on is shorter than the blinking interval of the other turnable parts of the ratio display 69 except for the part of the turnable part. That is, the blinking speed of the above-mentioned part of the ratio display 69 which can be turned on is faster than the blinking speed of the other turnable parts of the ratio display 69 excluding the part of the turnable part.

1.3. Sensor Error Determination Process The sensor error determination process (step S12) of FIG. 17 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The specific event detection means 112 determines whether or not the selector sensor A or B is in the ON state (step S71). If it is determined that neither of the selector sensors A and B is in the ON state (NO in step S71), the process returns to the process procedure of the power-on process of FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the selector sensor A or B is in the ON state (YES in step S71), the sensor error (EA error) flag is set to the error determination flag (step S72). The error determination flag is a so-called reservation flag (holding flag) for determining whether or not to notify the error by the sub CPU 71 for holding the transition to the error processing. Based on this error determination flag, a “payout abnormality” or the like, which will be described later, is transmitted to the sub CPU 71. Then, the procedure returns to the processing procedure of the power-on processing of FIG.

1.4. Setting Change Processing The setting change processing (step S7) of FIG. 17 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The setting control unit 101 determines whether the RWM backup failure of the main CPU 61 is set (step S101). This determination processing is to determine that the RWM backup failure is set when the RWM backup failure is set in step S37 of FIG.

  Then, when it is determined that the backup failure is not set (NO in step S101), the setting control unit 101 reads the setting value information (step S102), and proceeds to step S106.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the backup failure is set (YES in step S101), the payout display control unit 118 performs display control to display "C" on the set value display 56 (step S103). Then, the setting control unit 101 determines whether the setting change button 50c is in the on state (step S104). When it is determined that the setting change button 50c is not in the on state (NO in step S104), the standby state is set. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting change button 50c is in the on state (YES in step S104), the setting control unit 101 sets the setting value 1 (step S105), and the process proceeds to step S106.

  In step S106, the setting control unit 101 determines whether the setting change button 50c is in the on state. When it is determined that the setting change button 50c is in the on state (YES in step S106), the setting control unit 101 updates the set value (step S107) and returns to step S106.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting change button 50c is not in the on state (NO in step S106), the setting control unit 101 determines whether the operation of the start lever (start switch 19) is detected (step S106). S108). When it is determined that the operation of the start lever (start switch 19) is not detected (NO in step S108), the process returns to step S106. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation of the start lever (start switch 19) is detected (YES in step S108), the setting control unit 101 determines whether the setting change key switch 50b is in the off state (step S109). ). When it is determined that the setting change key switch 50b is not in the off state (NO in step S109), the standby state is set. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting change key switch 50b is in the off state (YES in step S109), the setting control unit 101 determines the set value (step S110), and the setting change process ends.

1.5. Error Processing The error processing (step S9) of FIG. 17 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the error processing of FIG. 22 (step S233), the error processing of FIG. 25 (step S254), the error processing of FIG. 31 (step S411), and the error processing of FIG. Is done.

  The game stopping means 113 stores the current game state (step S131). Then, the game stopping means 113 sets an error flag corresponding to the state of the error that has occurred (error state) and transmits it to the sub CPU 71 (step S132). Specifically, it is transmitted from the sub control command transmitting means 111 of the main CPU 61 to the sub control command receiving means 201 of the sub CPU 71.

  The game stopping means 113 stores the contents of the payout indicator 46 (step S133). The payout display control means 118 performs display control for displaying an error code on the payout display 46 (step S134).

  The game stopping means 113 saves the states of the hopper unit 43 and the cancel coil (medal selector 48) (step S135), and turns off the settings of the hopper unit 43 and the cancel coil (medal selector 48) (step S136).

  The game stopping means 113 determines whether or not it is in an E4 error state (step S137). When it is determined that the E4 error state is set (YES in step S137), the process waits until the setting is changed (step S138).

  When it is determined in the determination process of step S137 that it is not in the E4 error state (NO in step S137), the game stopping means 113 determines whether or not it is in the E3 error state (step S139). When it is determined that the E3 error state is not in effect (NO in step S139), the process proceeds to step S141. On the other hand, if it is determined that the E3 error is in effect (YES in step S139), the game stopping means 113 determines whether or not the error cancellation sensor is in the on state (step S140). Since step S140 results in an E3 error (hopper empty error), the error cancellation sensor here is a door key reset. This door key reset is established by turning a key (door key) for opening the front door 5 in a direction opposite to the unlocking direction of the front door 5. When it is determined that the error cancellation sensor is in the on state (YES in step S140), the process proceeds to step S143. On the other hand, when it is determined that the error cancellation sensor is not in the on state (NO in step S140), the process proceeds to step S141.

  In step S141, the game stopping means 113 determines whether or not the setting change button 50c is in the on state. The setting change button 50c here is a reset switch. When it is determined that the setting change button 50c is not in the on state (NO in step S141), the process returns to step S137.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting change button 50c is in the ON state (YES in step S141), the game stopping means 113 determines whether the door sensor 58 is in the ON state (step S142). If it is determined that the door sensor 58 is in the on state (YES in step S142), the process returns to step S137, and if it is determined that the door sensor 58 is not in the on state (NO in step S142), the process proceeds to step S143.

  In step S143, the game stopping means 113 determines whether or not any of the selector sensors A, B, C and the payout sensors A, B is in the ON state. When it is determined that any of the selector sensors A, B, C and the payout sensors A, B is in the ON state (YES in step S143), the process returns to step S137, and the selector sensors A, B, C, the payout sensor A, When it is determined that none of B is in the ON state (NO in step S143), the process proceeds to step S144.

  In step S144, the game stopping means 113 restores the states of the hopper unit 43 and the cancel coil (medal selector 48) to the original states (step S144). Then, the payout display control means 118 clears (initializes) the error code display (step S145). Furthermore, the game stopping means 113 restores the contents of the payout indicator 46 (step S146) and restores the game state (step S147).

  The main CPU 61 transmits an error canceling event (signal) to the sub CPU 71 (step S148), and determines whether to transmit the medal payout start event (signal) of the sub CPU 71 (step S149). Then, the error processing ends.

2. Main Processing Main processing will be described with reference to FIG. However, the main process is a process executed by the main CPU 61. One game starts from the setting of the bet number of medals until it becomes possible to set the bet number of medals for the next game. That is, one game is started from the start of the determination process of step S201 of the main process of FIG. 23 to the process of steps S202 to S222 and immediately before the determination process of step S201 is performed.

  First, when it is possible to set the bet number of medals, it is determined whether a prescribed number (three in the present embodiment) of medals have been inserted, and whether the bet number of medals has reached a predetermined bet number (step S201). The process waits until it is determined that the specified number of medals have been inserted (NO in step S201). On the other hand, when it is determined that the specified number of medals have been inserted (YES in step S201), it is determined whether the start switch 19 has been operated (step S202). The operation waits until it is determined that the start switch 19 has been operated (NO in step S202), and when it is determined that the start switch 19 has been operated (YES in step S202), the lottery process by the hand lottery means 103 is executed ( Step S203).

  In addition, in step S203, the winning combination lottery means 103 sets a drawing flag including a 3-bit advantageous period lamp lighting timing flag based on the winning combination drawing result. In the first embodiment, when the winning group “common bell 2” is won, 1 is set as the advantageous zone lamp lighting timing flag only in the second bit (“100”), and the winning group “middle-tier cherry” is set. When the winning group “Common Bell 1” is won, 1 is set only at the 0th bit (“001”) In all other cases, 0 is set in all bits (“000”).

  In step S203, the game state setting means 100b changes from the AT non-permissible state when the winning group “middle tier cherry”, “common bell 1”, “common bell 2” is won in the game in the AT non-permissible state. It is decided to shift to the AT permissible state, and a preset number of times (for example, 20 times) is given as the number of games in the AT permissible state and set in the AT remaining game number counter 654 to set the AT permissible state once. A predetermined number (for example, 1500) is set in the AT continuous game number counter 655 as the maximum number of games, and the game state of the slot machine 1 is set to the AT permissible state. Further, the game state setting means 100b performs a lottery to determine whether or not to add the number of games in the AT allowable state when the winning group "Replay" is won in the game in the AT allowable state, and the AT remaining game number counter The number of games according to the lottery result is added to 654.

  In step S203, the command creating means 108 creates a command including contents indicating the gaming state such as the AT non-permitted state and the AT permitted state, the contents indicating the winning group numbers (“0” to “10”), and the like. Then, the created command is transmitted from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71. Here, when the received command is a command indicating the AT non-permissible state and "No. 10" (winning combination group "common bell 2"), the production content determination means 202 of the sub CPU 71 plays the AT permissible transition determination production. It is decided to do it at the timing after the lottery. As a result, the effect display control means 203 executes the AT allowable shift determination effect. Further, when the received command is a command indicating the AT non-permissible state and "No. 5" (winning combination group "middle-tier cherry"), the effect content determination means 202 makes the AT permissible transition determination effect the first stop for the stop switch. Decide what to do at the timing after the operation. Further, when the received command is a command indicating the AT non-permissible state and "9" (winning combination group "common bell 1"), the effect content determination means 202 sets the AT permissible transition determination effect to all reels 13L and 13M. , 13R is decided at the timing after the stop.

  The payout display control means 118 determines whether or not the advantageous zone counting flag is on (content indicating counting; “1”) (step S204). When the advantageous period count flag is on (YES in step S204), the game is in the AT permissible state (game in the advantageous period), and thus the process proceeds to step S206. On the other hand, if the advantageous zone count flag is not on (NO in step S204), the payout display control means 118 sets the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data because it is a game in an AT non-permissible state (game in a zone that is not an advantageous zone). The process 1 is executed (step S205), and the process proceeds to step S206.

  In the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data setting process 1, the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data is set based on the second bit of the advantageous zone lamp lighting timing flag. The second bit of the advantageous zone lamp lighting timing flag is " If it is "1", the advantageous section lamp lighting control data is set to "1" (contents indicating that the advantageous section lamp 47 is lit), and if the second bit is "0", advantageous section lamp lighting control data. Do not change the value of. If the advantageous zone counting flag is not ON, the setting content of the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data is “0” (content indicating that the advantageous zone lamp 47 is off) immediately before execution of the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data setting process 1. ing. As described above, the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data setting process 1 sets the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data to “the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data on condition that the transition from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissible state by the winning of the winning group“ common bell 2 ”is determined. This is a process of setting to "1".

  However, when the winning group "Common Bell 2" is won in the game in the AT non-permissible state and the transition from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissible state is determined, the advantageous section lamp lighting control data is generated at the timing after the lottery process. Is set to "1", and the advantageous section lamp 47 is turned on in the lamp process (step S435) in the timer interrupt process of FIG. Further, in step S203, a command indicating the AT non-permissible state and "No. 10" (winning combination group "common bell 2") is transmitted from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71, and the effect content determination unit 202 and the effect display control unit 203 perform. At the timing after the lottery process, the AT allowable transition determination effect is performed. In this way, when the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data is set to "1" and the advantageous zone lamp is turned on before all the rotations of the reels 13L, 13M, 13R are stopped, all the reels 13L, 13M, 13R are turned on. Before the rotation stops, the AT allowable transition determination effect is performed.

  It should be noted that the AT allowable transition determination effect may be such that the reels 13L, 13M, 13R perform a special operation at the start of the rotation of the reels 13L, 13M, 13R, for example.

  After the winning combination lottery process, the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R start rotating (step S206). It is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to one of the spinning reels has been operated (step S207). If it is determined that the stop switch has not been operated (NO in step S207), the operation is performed. Wait until done. In step S207, when the stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R are operated, the command creating unit 108 creates a command including contents indicating the operated stop switch, and the created command is transmitted from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71. Sent to.

  Then, when it is determined that the stop switch corresponding to one of the spinning reels is operated (YES in step S207), the payout display control unit 118 turns on the advantageous zone counting flag (content indicating counting; 1 ”) is determined (step S208). When the advantageous period count flag is ON (YES in step S208), the game is in the AT permissible state (game in the advantageous period), and thus the process proceeds to step S210. On the other hand, when the advantageous zone count flag is not on (NO in step S208), the payout display control means 118 sets the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data because the game is in an AT non-permissible state (game in a zone that is not an advantageous zone). The process 2 is executed (step S209), and the process proceeds to step S210.

  In the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data setting process 2, the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data is set based on the first bit of the advantageous zone lamp lighting timing flag, and the first bit of the advantageous zone lamp lighting timing flag is " If the value is "1", the advantageous section lamp lighting control data is set to "1" (content indicating that the advantageous section lamp 47 is lighting), and if the first bit is "0", the advantageous section lamp lighting control data is set. Do not change the value of. If the advantageous zone counting flag is not ON, immediately before the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data setting process 2 is executed, the advantageous zone lamp is excluded except when the winning group “common bell 2” is won in the AT non-permissible state. The setting content of the lighting control data is "0" (content indicating that the advantageous zone lamp 47 is off), and when the winning group "common bell 2" is won in the AT non-permissible state, the advantageous zone lamp is set. The setting content of the lighting control data is "1". In this way, the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data setting process 2 sets the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data to “1” on condition that the transition from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissible state by the winning of the winning group “middle cherry” is determined. It is a process of setting to ".

  However, when the winning group “middle-tier cherry” is won in the game in the AT non-permissible state and the transition from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissible state is determined, the first one of the stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R. The advantageous section lamp lighting control data is set to "1" at the timing after the stop operation, and the advantageous section lamp 47 is lit by the lamp processing (step S435) in the timer interrupt processing of FIG. Further, in step S203, a command indicating the AT non-permissible state and "No. 5" (winning combination group "middle cherry") is transmitted from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71, and at this time, the effect content determination unit 202 first stops the stop switch. It is determined that the AT allowable shift determination effect is performed at the timing after the operation. Then, when the command including the content indicating the stop switch operated first in step S207 after the determination is transmitted from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71, the effect display control means 203 of the sub CPU 71 performs the AT allowable transition determination effect. .. In this way, when the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data is set to "1" and the advantageous zone lamp is turned on before all the rotations of the reels 13L, 13M, 13R are stopped, all the reels 13L, 13M, 13R are turned on. Before the rotation stops, the AT allowable transition determination effect is performed.

  It should be noted that the AT allowable transition determination effect may be such that the reels in the first stop perform a special operation, and control is performed to delay the period during which the stop operation of the second reel and thereafter is effective. It may be one.

  By the reel rotation stop control by the reel rotation control means 106, the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch is stopped (step S210). In step S210, when the reels 13L, 13M, and 13R stop, the command creating unit 108 creates a command including contents indicating the stopped reel, and the created command is transmitted from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71.

  A reel error determination process (E5 error), which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 25, is performed (step S211).

  After that, it is determined whether or not all the rotations of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, 13R have stopped (step S212). When it is determined that any of the left / center / right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (NO in step S212), the process returns to step S207. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the rotations of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R have stopped (YES in step S212), the symbol determination unit 109 determines the symbol (that is, the winning determination). (Step S213).

  Then, after the symbol determination process (winning determination process), a game information totaling process which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 26 is performed (step S214). Subsequently, the payout control means 110 executes a medal payout process as needed (step S215). The details of the medal payout process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Since the game information totaling process is performed after the symbol determination process (prize determination process) and before the medal payout process, for example, even when the setting is changed unexpectedly during payout of the game medium, the game Information aggregation processing has already been performed. Therefore, a calculation result obtained by performing a predetermined calculation using the aggregated data aggregated by the game information aggregation process (in the present embodiment, advantageous section ratio (cumulative), continuous character ratio (6000 games), character ratio ( 6000 games), continuous character ratio (cumulative), character ratio (total), can be easily inspected or confirmed by the inspector, and, for example, a setting change occurs unexpectedly during payout of game media. Even in the case of the above, it is possible to accurately count the total items.

  The payout display control means 118 determines whether or not the advantageous zone counting flag is on (content indicating counting; “1”) (step S216). If the advantageous zone count flag is ON (YES in step S216), the game is in the AT permissible state (game in the advantageous zone), and thus the process proceeds to step S218. On the other hand, when the advantageous zone count flag is not on (NO in step S216), the payout display control means 118 sets the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data because it is a game in an AT non-permissible state (game in a zone that is not an advantageous zone). The process 3 is executed (step S217), and the process proceeds to step S218.

  In the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data setting process 3, the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data is set based on the 0th bit of the advantageous zone lamp lighting timing flag, and the 0th bit of the advantageous zone lamp lighting timing flag is " If it is "1", the advantageous section lamp lighting control data is set to "1" (contents indicating that the advantageous section lamp 47 is lighting), and if the 0th bit is "0", the advantageous section lamp lighting control data is set. Do not change the value of. When the advantageous zone count flag is not ON, immediately before the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data setting process 3 is executed, the winning group “common bell 2” and “middle cherry” are won in the AT non-permissible state. Except for this, the setting content of the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data is “0” (content indicating that the advantageous zone lamp 47 is off), and the winning group “common bell 2” and “middle cherry” are set in the AT non-permissible state. When winning, the setting content of the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data is "1". In this way, the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data setting process 3 sets the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data to “the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data on condition that the transition from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissible state due to the winning of the winning group“ common bell 1 ”is determined. This is a process of setting to "1".

  However, when the winning group "Common Bell 1" is won in the game in the AT non-permissible state and the transition from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissible state is determined, the advantageous section lamp lighting control is performed at the timing after all reels are stopped. The data is set to "1", and the advantageous section lamp 47 is turned on in the ramp processing (step S435) in the timer interrupt processing of FIG. Further, in step S203, a command indicating the AT non-permissible state and "9" (winning combination group "common bell 1") is transmitted from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71. At this time, the effect content determination means 202 indicates that all reels have been stopped. It has been decided to perform the AT allowable transition determination effect at the timing. Then, in step S210, when the command including the content indicating the reel stopped and the like is transmitted from the main CPU 61 for all reels to the sub CPU 71, the effect display control means 203 of the sub CPU 71 performs the AT allowable transition determination effect.

  The AT allowable shift determination effect may be, for example, one in which the reel in the third stop performs a special operation, or may be a control in which the payout process is delayed.

  The payout display control means 118 determines whether or not the advantageous zone counting flag is on (content indicating counting; “1”) (step S218). If the advantageous zone count flag is not on (NO in step S218), the game is in the AT non-permissible state (game in the zone that is not the advantage zone), and thus the process proceeds to step S222. On the other hand, when the advantage zone counting flag is on (YES in step S218), the game is in the AT permissible state (game in the advantage zone), so the game state setting means 219 performs the advantage zone end determination processing (step). S219).

  In the advantageous section end determination processing, the AT remaining game number counter 654 is decremented by 1, it is determined whether or not the player has won the falling lottery after the AT remaining game number counter 654 becomes 0, and the AT continuous game number counter 655 is set. It is determined whether or not it decrements by 1 and becomes 0. When the AT remaining game number counter 654 becomes 0 or when the falling lottery is won or when the AT continuous game number counter 655 becomes 0, the advantageous section end condition is satisfied (the advantageous section is ended in the game being executed). ), And shifts from the next game to the AT non-permissible state. On the other hand, when neither the AT remaining game number counter 654 nor the AT continuous game number counter 655 is 0, it is determined that the advantageous period end condition is not satisfied (the advantageous period is not ended in the game being executed).

  When the determination result of the advantageous zone end determination processing (step S219) does not satisfy the advantageous zone end condition (NO in step S220), the payout display control unit 118 proceeds to step S222. On the other hand, when the advantageous period end condition is satisfied (YES in step S220), the payout display control means 118 performs the advantageous period lamp lighting control data setting process 4 (step S221), and proceeds to step S222. In the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data setting process 4, the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data is set to “0” (content indicating that the advantageous zone lamp is off).

  The tallying unit 114a performs the advantageous section count flag setting process (step S222), and returns to step S201. The advantageous zone counting flag setting process is performed by setting the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data set at the time of the processing as the advantageous zone counting flag. That is, at the processing point of the advantageous period count flag setting processing, if the set value of the advantageous period lamp lighting control data is "1" (content indicating that the advantageous period lamp 47 is lit), the advantageous period count flag is set to "1". (One game is counted as an AT permissible state, that is, a game in an advantageous section), and the setting value of the advantageous section lamp lighting control data is "0" (content indicating that the advantageous section lamp 47 is off). Sets the advantageous section count flag to "0" (1 game is not counted as an AT permissible state, that is, a game in the advantageous section).

  However, in the first embodiment, the advantageous period count flag setting process is performed after the rotation of all the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, 13R is stopped, regardless of the setting timing of the advantageous period lamp lighting control data. And, after all the setting timings of the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data in the game have passed and until the bet number setting of medals for the next game becomes possible, a game that collects various data It is performed after the information aggregation process.

  Note that the advantageous section lamp lighting control data is used for the advantageous section count flag setting processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous section lamp lighting timing is set when the advantageous section count flag is "0" (not on). The advantageous period count flag is set to "1" when any one of the three bits of the flag is "1", and the advantageous period end condition is set when the advantage period count flag is "1" (ON). When the condition is satisfied, the advantageous section count flag may be set to "0". Further, the series of processing in steps S204 and S205, the series of processing in steps S208 and S209, and the series of processing in steps S216 and S217 may be performed by the same subroutine processing. In this case, at the time of shifting to the subroutine, the bit number of the advantageous period lamp lighting timing flag to be used is transferred.

  When the winning group “common bell 1”, “shared bell 2”, and “middle cherry” are won in the AT non-permissible state without using the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data and the advantageous zone lamp lighting timing flag The advantageous zone counting flag may be set to "1" and the advantageous zone counting flag may be set to "0" when the advantageous zone ending condition is satisfied in the AT allowed state.

  Also, when the winning group “middle tier cherry” is elected in the AT non-permissible state and the transition from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissible state is decided, the cherry does not stop on the winning line at the first stop. Alternatively, the AT allowable shift determination effect may be performed after all reels are stopped.

2.1. Overflow error determination process Although not shown in the main process of FIG. 23 using FIG. 24, an overflow that is performed after the medal payout process (step S215) and before the specified number insertion determination process (step S201) in the main process. The error determination process will be described.

  The specific event detection means 112 determines whether or not an overflow error has occurred (step S231). Specifically, when the auxiliary tank is full of medals, the two overflow sensors 57a inserted in the auxiliary tank are energized, and when the energization continues for a predetermined time or longer. It is determined that an overflow error has occurred. When it is determined that the overflow error has not occurred (NO in step S231), the procedure returns to the processing procedure of the main processing in FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the overflow error has occurred (YES in step S231), the specific event detection unit 112 sets the error code "E6" (step S232). Then, the error process described in detail with reference to FIG. 22 is performed by the game stopping means 113 or the like (step S233), and the process returns to the main process procedure of FIG.

2.2. Reel Error Determination Processing The reel error determination processing (step S211) of FIG. 23 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The specific event detection means 112 determines whether or not all of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, 13R (rotating drums) have stopped rotating (step S251). When it is determined that all of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R have stopped rotating (YES in step S251), the process returns to the main process of FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that one of the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R has not stopped spinning (NO in step S251), the specific event detection unit 112 causes the spinning reel (revolving drum). It is determined whether or not the rotation is the steady rotation state in which it is rotating at the steady rotation speed (step S252). When it is determined that the rotation of the spinning reel is in the steady rotation state (YES in step S252), the process returns to step S251.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the rotation of the spinning reel is not in the steady rotation state (NO in step S252), the specific event detection unit 112 sets the error code "E5" (step S253). Then, the error processing described in detail with reference to FIG. 22 is performed by the game stopping means 113 or the like (step S254).

  Then, the main CPU 61 restarts the reel (revolving drum) (step S255). Specifically, the rotation is stopped once, and the rotation is started at a normal rotation acceleration to a normal rotation speed. It should be noted that the normal rotation speed may be set without stopping once. Then, the main CPU 61 sets that the reel (revolving drum) can be stopped (step S256). That is, by setting the turning cylinder stop possible in the step, the reel is stopped at the position where it should be stopped without operating the stop switch. Then, the process returns to step S251.

2.3. Game information totaling process The game information totaling process (step S214) of FIG. 23 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The tallying means 114a adds the number of winning coins in this game to the total payout amount in the period corresponding to the ring pointer in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. 10, later using FIG. 27. The 400 update process described in detail is performed (step S271).

  The tallying unit 114a determines whether or not the first-class accessory (for example, BB) is in progress (step S272). If it is determined that the character is not in the type 1 accessory (NO in step S272), the process proceeds to step S274. On the other hand, when it is determined that the character is in the type 1 accessory (YES in step S272), the counting unit 114a continues the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. A 400 update process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 27, is performed in which the winning number in this game is added to the bonus payout number (step S273). Then, the process proceeds to step S274.

  In step S274, the tallying unit 114a determines whether or not the first-class accessory or the second-class accessory (for example, CB) is being performed. When it is determined that the type 1 accessory or the type 2 accessory is being used (YES in step S274), the process proceeds to step S276. On the other hand, when it is determined that the character is neither the first type character nor the second type character (NO in step S274), the aggregation unit 114a determines whether or not the normal character (for example, SB) is in effect ( Step S275). If it is determined that the normal character is in use (YES in step S275), the process proceeds to step S276, while if it is determined that the normal character is not in use (NO in step S275), the process proceeds to step S277.

  In step S276, the counting means 114a adds the number of winning prizes in this game to the number of bonus character payouts for the period corresponding to the ring pointer in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 of FIG. 10, FIG. A 400 update process, which will be described in detail later, is performed by using this (step S276) and the process proceeds to step S277.

  In step S277, the totaling means 114a determines whether the total game number upper limit flag is 0 (that is, whether the total game number is less than or equal to the maximum value of 4 bytes for storing the total cumulative total game number in FIG. 10). Whether or not) is determined. When it is determined that the total game number upper limit flag is not 0 (NO in step S277), the process proceeds to step S281. On the other hand, if it is determined that the total game number upper limit flag is 0 (YES in step S277), the tallying unit 114a adds 1 to the total cumulative total number of games in FIG. The number-of-games update process described in detail in step S278 is performed, and the process proceeds to step S279.

  In step S279, the tallying unit 114a determines whether or not the advantageous section count flag is on (“1”) (whether or not the advantageous section count flag indicates that the current game is counted as the number of advantageous section games). ) Is determined. When it is determined that the advantageous section counting flag is not on (content indicating that counting is not performed) (NO in step S279), the process proceeds to step S281. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section count flag is on (content indicating counting) (YES in step S279), the tallying unit 114a adds 1 to the number of advantageous section games of FIG. 10, FIG. The number-of-games update process, which will be described later in detail, is carried out using this (step S280), and the process proceeds to step S281.

  In step S281, the tallying unit 114a sets 1 to the number of times of ratio calculation (step S281).

  Subsequently, the tallying unit 114a performs an updating process of adding 1 to the 400 counter (game number counter 652) (step S282). Then, the counting unit 114a determines whether the 400 counter is 400 (step S283). Then, if it is determined that the 400 counter is not 400 (NO in step S283), the process returns to the main process procedure in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 400 counter is 400 (YES in step S283), the aggregation unit 114a resets the 400 counter to 0 and sets the ratio calculation count to 5 (step S284). That is, the ratio calculation count is set to 5 for every 400 games, and the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), continuous character ratio (6000 games), character ratio (6000 games), continuous character ratio (total), character ratio (Cumulative) will be calculated, and in other games, the ratio calculation number is set to 1 and only the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) will be calculated.

  Subsequent to step S284, the tallying unit 114a accumulates the total payout number from the first period P1 to the 15th period P15 in FIG. 10 and stores the cumulative result in the cumulative PS as the total payout number for the latest 6000 games, A 6000 update process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 29, is performed for every 400 games (step S285). Subsequently, the totaling unit 114a accumulates the number of consecutive bonus payouts from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 of FIG. 10 and stores the cumulative result in the cumulative PS as the number of consecutive bonus payouts for the latest 6000 games. A 6000 update process described later in detail with reference to FIG. 29 is performed for every 400 games (step S286). Further subsequently, the totaling means 114a accumulates the number of bonus payouts from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 of FIG. 10 and stores the cumulative result in the cumulative PS as the number of bonus payouts for the latest 6000 games. The 6000 update process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 29, is performed for every 400 games (step S287).

  Subsequent to step S287, the totalizing means 114a determines whether or not the total payout upper limit flag is 0 (that is, the total total payout number is a 4-byte maximum value for storing the total total payout number in FIG. 10). It is determined whether or not) (step S288). When it is determined that the total payout upper limit flag is not 0 (NO in step S288), the process proceeds to step S292.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the total payout upper limit flag is 0 (YES in step S288), the tallying unit 114a sets the total cumulative total number of payouts in FIG. 10 from the first period P1 to the 15th period P15. The total payout number of the total cumulative is updated by adding the total payout number of the period corresponding to the ring pointer (the total payout number of the last 400 games). The cumulative update process described in detail later with reference to FIG. , Every 400 games (step S289). Subsequently, the totaling unit 114a calculates the total cumulative number of consecutive accessory payouts in FIG. 10 in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 (for the latest 400 games). The cumulative update amount of the total cumulative number of continuous bonuses is updated by adding the continuous bonus payout number of (1) for each 400 games (step S290). Further subsequently, the aggregating unit 114a calculates the total cumulative number of bonus character payouts in FIG. 10 corresponding to the ring pointer from the first term P1 to the fifteenth term P15 (for the last 400 games). The total cumulative number of bonuses paid out is updated by adding (the number of bonuses paid out), and a cumulative update process described in detail later with reference to FIG. 30 is performed for every 400 games (step S291). move on.

  In step S292, the tallying unit 114a updates the ring pointer (step S292). The ring pointer points in the order of the first period P1, the second period P2, the third period P3, ..., The 14th period P14, the 15th period P15, the first period P1, the second period P2 ,. In other words, the game is updated every 400 games so as to indicate while repeating the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in order.

  The aggregation unit 114a determines whether the ring pointer update result is 0, that is, whether the ring pointer has returned to the initial position (step S293). When it is determined that the ring pointer update result is not 0 (NO in step S293), the process proceeds to step S295. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ring pointer update result is 0 (YES in step S293), the aggregation unit 114a has reached 6000 games since the number of games after installation or after RWM clear has reached 6000. (Hexadecimal notation) is set (step S294), and the process proceeds to step S295. The 6000 arrival flag is set to $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) at the time of installation or when RWM is cleared.

  The tallying unit 114a clears the total payout amount (the oldest total payout amount for 400 games) of the period corresponding to the updated ring pointer in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 of FIG. Is set to 0 (step S295). Subsequently, the tallying unit 114a determines the number of consecutive bonus payouts in the period corresponding to the ring pointer in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 of FIG. The value is cleared to 0 (step S296). Further, subsequently, the tallying unit 114a clears the number of bonus characters paid out in the period corresponding to the ring pointer in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 of FIG. To set the value to 0 (step S297). Then, the procedure returns to the processing procedure of the main processing in FIG.

2.3.1. 400 Update Process The 400 update process (steps S271, S273, S276) in FIG. 26 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The totaling unit 114a acquires the RWM address corresponding to the ring pointer (step S311), adds the number of winning prizes in the current game to the value of the acquired RWM address (step S312), and performs the game information totaling process of FIG. Return to the processing procedure.

  However, the RWM address corresponding to the ring pointer is the total payout number in the period corresponding to the ring pointer in the first period P1 to the 15th period P15 in FIG. 10 in the 400 update process related to the total payout number in step S271. In the 400 update process relating to the number of consecutive winnings payouts in step S273, the consecutive winning combination of the period corresponding to the ring pointer in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 of FIG. This is the address of the storage area in which the number of paid-out goods is stored, and in the 400 update processing related to the number of paid-out goods in step S276, the period corresponding to the ring pointer in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 of FIG. This is the address of the storage area that stores the number of bonus payouts.

2.3.2. Game Number Update Process The game number update process (steps S278 and S280) in FIG. 26 will be described with reference to FIG.

  Here, in the game number update process related to the total game number in step 278, 4 bytes of the total game number of the total accumulation in FIG. 10 is the update target, and in the game number update process related to the advantageous zone game number in step S280, the update process is performed in FIG. 4 bytes, which is the total number of advantageous section games, is to be updated.

  The aggregation unit 114a performs an update process of adding 1 to the value of the lower 2 bytes of the 4 bytes of the RWM 65 to be updated (step S331). Then, the tallying unit 114a determines whether or not the update result of the lower 2 bytes (that is, the updated value of the lower 2 bytes) is 0 (step S332). When it is determined that the update result is not 0 (NO in step S332), the process returns to the process procedure of the game information totaling process in FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the update result of the lower 2 bytes is 0 (YES in step S332), since a carry has occurred, the tallying unit 114a determines the upper 2 of the 4 bytes of the RWM 65 to be updated. An update process of adding 1 to the byte value is performed (step S333), and the process proceeds to step S334.

  Then, the aggregation unit 114a determines whether or not the update result of the upper 2 bytes (that is, the value of the upper 2 bytes after the update) is 0 (step S334). When it is determined that the update result is not 0 (NO in step S334), the process returns to the process procedure of the game information totaling process in FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the update result of the upper 2 bytes is 0 (YES in step S334), the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of 4 bytes before updating exceeds the maximum value 2 ³² −1 that can be represented by 4 bytes. Therefore, the totalizing unit 114a sets $ FF (hexadecimal notation) in the total game number upper limit flag (step S335). The total game number upper limit flag is set to $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) at the time of installation or when RWM is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S335, the totalizing unit 114a sets $ FF (hexadecimal notation) to each of the first byte to the fourth byte of the RWM 65 to be updated (step S336), and performs the game information totaling process of FIG. Return to the processing procedure.

  However, since the game number updating process related to the total number of games and the game number updating process related to the advantageous period game number are performed in the same subroutine, this subroutine is performed even in the case of a model having no function related to the advantageous period. It is supposed to be executed. On the other hand, if the game number update process for the total number of games and the game number update process for the advantageous period game number are performed in separate subroutines, if the model does not have the function related to the advantageous period, The subroutine for the number-of-games update process related to the number of advantageous-zone games is not executed, resulting in a so-called "unused program". However, in the present embodiment, the game number updating process for the total number of games and the game number updating process for the advantageous period game number are performed in the same subroutine, so this subroutine has a function related to the advantageous period. Even if the model does not exist, it does not become an "unused program", and even if the model has different performance, the program can be diverted and the burden on development can be reduced.

  Further, in the game number updating process related to the number of advantageous zone games, a process step of setting the total game number upper limit flag is included, but the total game number upper limit flag is first set in the game number updating process related to the total game number. Since $ FF (hexadecimal notation) will be set, $ FF (hexadecimal notation) will not be set in the total game number upper limit flag in the game number updating process related to the advantageous zone game number.

2.3.3. 6000 Update Process The 6000 update process (steps S285, S286, S287) in FIG. 26 will be described with reference to FIG.

  Here, in the 6000 update process relating to the total payout amount in step S285, the RWM address of the storage amount area (2 bytes) of the total payout amount in each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. 10 is sequentially added. It becomes the RWM address, and the RWM address of the storage area (3 bytes) of the total payout number of cumulative PS shown in FIG. 10 becomes the augend address. In addition, in the 6000 update process relating to the number of consecutive bonus payouts in step S286, the RWM address of the storage area (2 bytes) of the number of consecutive bonus payouts in each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 of FIG. The addition RWM address becomes the address in order, and the RWM address of the storage area (3 bytes) of the continuous PS payout number of the cumulative PS shown in FIG. Furthermore, in the 6000 update process relating to the number of bonus payouts in step S287, the RWM address of the storage area (2 bytes) of the number of bonus payouts in each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 of FIG. It becomes the added RWM address, and the RWM address of the storage area (3 bytes) for the number of bonus character payouts of the cumulative PS shown in FIG. 10 becomes the added address.

  The aggregation means 114a clears the added RWM address for 3 bytes and sets the value to 0 (step S351).

  Since the accumulation target is the 15th period from the 1st period P1 to the 15th period P15, the counting unit 114a sets the number of repetitions to 15, and the 1st period from the 1st period P1 to the 15th period P15. The address of the storage area of P1 is set as the added RWM address (step S352).

  Then, the aggregating unit 114a updates the value of the lower 2 bytes of the added RWM address by adding the value of 2 bytes of the added RWM address to the value of the lower 2 bytes of the added RWM address (step S353). Then, the aggregation unit 114a determines whether or not the calculation result is a carry-on (that is, whether or not a carry has occurred) (step S354). Then, when it is determined that the calculation result is not the carry-on (NO in step S354), the process proceeds to step S356. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation result is a carry-on (YES in step S354), the aggregating unit 114a adds 1 to the value of the 3rd byte of the RWM address to be added to obtain the value of the 3rd byte of the RWM address to be added. It is updated (step S355), and the process proceeds to step S356.

  In step S356, the aggregation unit 114a updates the added RWM address. Here, the addition RWM address is updated so that the addition target is updated in the next period, for example.

  Subsequent to step S356, the counting unit 114a subtracts 1 from the number of repetitions (step S357), and determines whether the number of repetitions is 0 (step S358). If it is determined that the number of repetitions is not 0 (NO in step S358), the accumulation process from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 has not been completed, and thus the process returns to step S353. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of repetitions is 0 (YES in step S358), the cumulative processing from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 has ended, so the game information totaling process of FIG. 26 is performed. Return to the processing procedure. In this way, the values from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period are accumulated, and the accumulated result is stored in the accumulated PS.

2.3.4. Cumulative Update Process The cumulative update process (steps S289, S290, and S291) in FIG. 26 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The aggregation means 114a acquires the RWM address (additional RWM address) corresponding to the ring pointer (step S371). However, in the cumulative update processing relating to the total payout number in step S289 as the RWM address corresponding to the ring pointer, the total payout number in the period corresponding to the ring pointer in the first period P1 to the 15th period P15 in FIG. The address of the storage area (2 bytes) will be acquired, and in the cumulative update processing relating to the number of consecutive accessory payouts in step S290, the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. The address of the storage area (2 bytes) for the number of consecutive bonus payouts for the period corresponding to is acquired, and in the cumulative update process related to the number of bonus payouts in step S291, The address of the storage area (2 bytes) of the number of bonus payouts for the period corresponding to the ring pointer in the period P15 up to the 15th period is acquired.

  Subsequent to step S371, the aggregating unit 114a updates the value of the lower 2 bytes of the added RWM address by adding the value of the added RWM address to the value of the lower 2 bytes of the added RWM address (step S372). However, in the cumulative update process relating to the total payout number in step S289, the lower 2 bytes of the total payout number of the total cumulative numbers in FIG. 10 are the lower 2 bytes of the augmented RWM address, and are related to the continuous accessory payout number in step S290. In the cumulative total update process, the lower 2 bytes of the total cumulative continuous bonus payout number of FIG. 10 are the lower 2 bytes of the added RWM address, and in the cumulative update process of the bonus payout number of step S291 of FIG. The lower-order 2 bytes of the total cumulative number of payouts of the accessory are the lower-order 2 bytes of the added RWM address.

  Then, the tallying unit 114a determines whether or not the calculation result in step S372 is a carry-on, that is, whether a carry has occurred (step S373). When it is determined that the calculation result is not the carry-on (NO in step S373), the process returns to the process procedure of the game information totaling process in FIG. On the other hand, when the calculation result is determined to be a caryon (YES in step S373), the aggregation unit 114a updates the RWM address to be added (step S374). However, the augmented RWM address after the update is the address of the upper 2 bytes of the total payout number of the total cumulative total of FIG. 10 in the cumulative update process relating to the total payout number of step S289, and the continuous accessory payout number of step S290. In the cumulative update process according to FIG. 10, it is the address of the upper 2 bytes of the total cumulative continuous payout number in FIG. 10, and in the cumulative update process related to the bonus payout number in step S291, the total cumulative effect in FIG. This is the address of the upper 2 bytes of the payout number.

  The aggregating unit 114a updates the value of the upper 2 bytes of the added RWM address by adding 1 to the value of the upper 2 bytes of the added RWM address (step S375), and the update result in step S375 is 0. It is determined whether or not (whether or not the value of the upper 2 bytes is 0) (step S376). When it is determined that the update result is not 0 (NO in step S376), the process returns to the process procedure of the game information totaling process in FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the update result is 0 (YES in step S376), the result obtained by adding the 2-byte value of the addition RWM to the 4-byte value of the augmented RWM address before the update is the 4-byte maximum value. since more than 2 ³² -1, aggregator 114a sets the $ FF (16 hexadecimal notation) the total payout limit flag (step S377). The total payout upper limit flag is set to $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) at the time of installation or when RWM is cleared. Then, the totaling unit 114a sets $ FF (hexadecimal notation) in each of the first byte to the fourth byte that was the update target of the RWM 65 (step S378), and the processing procedure of the game information totaling process of FIG. Return to.

2.4. Medal Payout Process The medal payout process (step S215) of FIG. 23 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The payout control means 110 determines whether or not there is a payout of medals (step S401). When it is determined that no medals have been paid out (NO in step S401), the process returns to the main process procedure of FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the medals are paid out (YES in step S401), the payout control unit 110 determines whether the number of credit medals is 50 (step S402). When it is determined that the number of credit medals is less than 50 (NO in step S402), the process proceeds to step S408.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of credit medals is 50 (YES in step S402), the specific event detection unit 112 sets a determination time for a payout game medal run-out error (E3 error) (step S403). When the payout is not made even after the lapse of a predetermined time, the counting of the determination time (counting of time) for determining that the medals in the hopper unit 43 are empty is started.

  The payout control means 110 performs rotation control to start rotation of the hopper motor 57 of the hopper unit 43 (step S404).

  The specific event detection means 112 determines whether or not the determination time of the payout game medal run-out error (E3 error) has elapsed (step S405). When it is determined that the determination time has elapsed (YES in step S405), the process proceeds to step S410.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination time has not elapsed (NO in step S405), the payout control unit 110 determines whether one medal has been paid out (step S406). In this, the payout sensor 54 of the hopper unit 43 detects whether or not one medal has been paid out. If it is determined that one medal has been paid out (YES in step S406), the process proceeds to the next step S407, and if it is determined that one medal has not been paid out (NO in step S406). , And returns to step S404.

  In step S407, the payout control unit 110 determines whether the payout of medals has been completed. If it is determined that the medal payout is completed (YES in step S407), the process returns to the main processing procedure of FIG. 23, and if it is determined that the medal payout is not completed (NO in step S407). , And returns to step S403.

  When it is determined in the determination process in step S402 that the number of credit medals is less than 50 (NO in step S402), the payout control unit 110 adds one to the number of credit medals (the number of stored coins) (step S408). .. As a result, the number of credit medals (the number of stored coins) displayed on the payout indicator 46 is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S408, the payout control means 110 determines whether or not the payout of medals has been completed (step S409). When it is determined that the medal payout is completed (YES in step S409), the procedure returns to the processing procedure of the main process in FIG. 23, and when it is determined that the medal payout is not completed (NO in step S409). , And returns to step S402.

  When it is determined in the determination processing in step S405 that the determination time has elapsed (YES in step S405), the specific event detection unit 112 sets an error code "E3" (step S410). Then, the error processing described in detail with reference to FIG. 22 is performed by the game stopping means 113 and the like (step S411), and the process returns to step S403.

3. Timer Interrupt Processing The timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. However, the timer interrupt process of FIG. 32 is a process executed by the main CPU 61.

  First, the phase output processing is performed on each of the stepping motors as the left, middle, and right reel motors 14L, 14M, and 14R (step S431). Specifically, the excitation data for rotating the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, 13R is output to each of the stepping motors.

  A command transmission process is performed from the sub control command transmission unit 111 of the main CPU 61 to the sub control command reception unit 201 of the sub CPU 71 (step S432). Specifically, this command is a command transmission process from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 that is normally transmitted, and is actually transmitted from the sub control command transmitting unit 111 to the sub control command receiving unit 201. ..

  In the power supply unit including the power switch 50a and the like, it is determined whether or not the power supply is cut off (power supply is cut off, that is, power supply is stopped) (step S433). When it is determined that the power is cut off (YES in step S433), the power cut-off process described in detail later with reference to FIG. 33 is performed (step S434), and the timer interrupt process is ended.

  When it is determined in the determination process in step S433 that the power is not turned off (NO in step S433), the ramp process is performed (step S435). Although not particularly shown, this lamp is a bet number display lamp, a re-game display lamp, etc., and is controlled by the main CPU 61. Further, in the lamp processing in step S435, the payout display control unit 118 sets the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data to "1" (content indicating the lighting of the advantageous zone lamp) based on the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data. In this case, control is performed to turn on the advantageous zone lamp 47. If the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data is set to "0" (content indicating that the advantageous zone lamp is off), the advantageous zone lamp 47 is turned off. Control is performed.

  Then, port input processing is performed (step S436). This port input processing is performed by sensors for the main CPU 61 (the insertion sensor 53 of the medal selector 48, the payout sensor 54 of the hopper unit 43, the overflow sensor 57a, the bet switch 15, the maximum bet switch 17, the left / middle / right stop switches 21L and 21M. , 21R, etc.).

  After that, a use area external interruption process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 35, is performed (step S437).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is a transmission command for transmission from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 (step S438). When it is determined that there is no transmission command (NO in step S438), the process proceeds to step S440. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a transmission command (YES in step S438), the set transmission command (abnormal insertion in steps S564 and S570 in FIG. 36, which will be described later in detail, and payout in step S603 in FIG. 39). Abnormality, the door state of step S635 of FIG. 41) is transmitted (step S439), and the process proceeds to step S440.

  In step S440, it is determined whether there is error data. This error data is a flag for notifying an error in the main CPU 61 (shifting to error processing), and when the error data is set (turned on), the main CPU 61 shifts to error processing. It is a thing. Specifically, it is set in steps S572 and S574 of FIG. 36, steps S607 and S611 of FIG. 39, and step S622 of FIG. 40 described later.

  If it is determined that the error data is set (ON state) (YES in step S440), the error processing described in detail with reference to FIG. 22 is performed by the game stopping means 113 or the like (step S441), The timer interrupt process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the error data has not been set (not in the ON state) (NO in step S440), it is determined whether or not to insert medals (step S442), and determination of payout of medals is performed (step S443). Timer update processing is performed (step S444), and port output processing is performed (step S445). Then, an external signal output process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 34, is performed (step S446).

  Subsequently, the display control unit 115 performs the ratio display setting (FIGS. 48 to 50) in step S536 of FIG. 35, which will be described later, and the like. The display of the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 is controlled by using the set values of the ones digit and the ones digit (step S447). Then, control processing of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R (revolving drum) is performed (step S448).

3.1. Power interruption process The power interruption process (step S434) of FIG. 32 will be described with reference to FIG. However, the power interruption process of FIG. 33 is a process executed by the main CPU 61.

  The stack pointer is set (step S471). This holds the address of the most recently referenced position in the memory area called the stack. Following step S471, the power failure flag is set (step S472). It stores a predetermined numerical value. Following step S472, the checksum value is set (step S473). Then, the processing returns to the processing procedure of the timer interrupt processing of FIG.

3.2. External Signal Output Processing The external signal output processing (step S446) of FIG. 32 will be described with reference to FIG. However, the external signal output process of FIG. 34 is a process executed by the main CPU 61.

  It is determined whether the door (specifically, the front door 5) is in the open state, that is, whether the door sensor 58 is OFF (step S501).

  When it is determined that the front door 5 is in the closed state (NO in step S501), the process proceeds to step S503. On the other hand, if it is determined that the front door 5 is in the open state (YES in step S501), the external signal 5 output hold timer is set (step S502), and the process proceeds to step S503. Specifically, the count (timekeeping) of the external signal 5 output hold timer is started. Here, the "output suspension timer" is a timer for continuing to output a predetermined signal when the door (front door 5) is opened or a predetermined error occurs. Specifically, for example, when the door (front door 5) is opened, a timer is set for 3 seconds after the door is opened, and even if the door (front door 5) is moved from the open state to the closed state during that time, the timer is set for 3 seconds. The signal is set so as not to be turned off until the time of the timer is elapsed. As a result, even if the open state is instantaneously changed to the closed state, the state in which the door (front door 5) is once opened can be reliably output to the outside. Specifically, this signal output is output to the hall computer managed by the hall manager of the game hall by the external centralized terminal board 59. The "hold timer" of the external signal 4 output hold timer, which will be described later, has a similar function.

  In step S503, it is determined whether or not the external signal 5 output hold timer is operating (step S503). When it is determined that the external signal 5 output hold timer is operating (YES in step S503), the external signal 5 is turned on (step S504), and the process proceeds to step S506. On the other hand, when it is determined that the external signal 5 output hold timer is not operating (NO in step S503), the external signal 5 is turned off (step S505), and the process proceeds to step S506.

  It is determined whether or not the specific conditions are met (step S506). Here, to match this specific condition is specifically, (1) E0 error, (2) E1 error, (3) E2 error, (4) E7 error, (5) EA error, (6) E0. It means that any one of (1) to (8) of the error determination flag on, (7) E2 error determination flag on, and (8) EA error determination flag on is satisfied. Here, (1) to (5) are based on a regular error signal indicating a state in which an error corresponding to the error code has occurred, and the “error determination flag” of (6) to (8) is a so-called reserved. It is a flag (hold flag).

  When it is determined that none of the specific conditions is met (NO in step S506), the process proceeds to step S508. On the other hand, if it is determined that any of the specific conditions is met (YES in step S506), the external signal 4 output hold timer is set (step S507), and the process proceeds to step S508. Specifically, the count (timekeeping) of the external signal 4 output hold timer is started.

  In step S508, it is determined whether the external signal 4 output hold timer is operating. If it is determined that the external signal 4 output hold timer is operating (YES in step S508), the external signal 4 is turned on (step S509), and the process returns to the processing procedure of the timer interrupt process in FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the external signal 4 output hold timer is not operating (NO in step S508), the external signal 4 is turned off (step S510), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing procedure in FIG.

3.3. External Use Area Interrupt Processing The external use area interrupt processing (step S437) of FIG. 32 will be described with reference to FIG. However, the external use area interrupt process of FIG. 35 is a process executed by the main CPU 61.

  Monitoring processing of the selector sensor (specifically, the insertion sensor 53) of the medal selector 48, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 36, 37, and 38, is performed (step S531). Subsequently, a monitoring process of the payout sensor 54, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40, is performed (step S532). Subsequently, a monitoring process of a door (specifically, the front door 5) which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 41 is performed (step S533).

  Then, a ratio display related timer updating process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 42, is performed (step S534). Subsequently, each ratio calculation described in detail later with reference to FIG. 43 is performed (step S535). Subsequently, each ratio display setting, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 48, is performed (step S536). Then, the procedure returns to the procedure of the timer interrupt process of FIG.

3.3.1 Selector Sensor Monitoring Processing The selector sensor monitoring processing (step S531) in FIG. 35 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36, 37 and 38.

  The specific event detection means 112 determines whether or not the selector sensor C has timed out (step S561). This is to cause an E0 error (game medal error) when the selector sensor C remains in the ON state for 1.6 seconds. When it is determined that the selector sensor C has not timed out (NO in step S561), the process proceeds to step S565.

  On the other hand, when the selector sensor C is determined to be overtime (YES in step S561), the specific event detection unit 112 sets the E0 error flag to the error determination flag (step S562). Then, the E0 error flag and the error determination flag are turned on. This error determination flag is a flag that reserves (holds) the transition to error processing due to an error. It should be noted that, based on this error determination flag, "submitting abnormality", "dispensing abnormality", etc. of a transmission command described later are transmitted to the sub CPU 71.

  Subsequent to step S562, the specific event detection means 112 determines whether any of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (step S563). When it is determined that none of the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (NO in step S563), the process proceeds to step S565. On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (YES in step S563), the specific event detection means 112 causes the main CPU 61 to send a command to the sub CPU 71. The "insertion abnormality" of the medal is set to (step S564), and the process proceeds to the next step S565.

  In step S565, the specific event detection means 112 determines whether any of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (step S565). When it is determined that any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (YES in step S565), the process proceeds to step S567. On the other hand, when it is determined that none of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (NO in step S565), the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether or not the medal is being paid out. (Step S566). If it is determined that the medal is being paid out (YES in step S566), the process proceeds to step S567, and if it is determined that the medal is not being paid out (NO in step S566), the process proceeds to step S571.

  In step S567, the specific event detection means 112 determines whether or not the selector sensor A or B as the closing sensor 53 is in the ON state. If it is determined that neither the selector sensor A nor the selector sensor B is in the ON state (NO in step S567), the process returns to the processing procedure of the outside-use-area interrupt process in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the selector sensor A or B is in the ON state (YES in step S567), the specific event detection unit 112 sets the EA error (sensor error) flag to the error determination flag (step S568). This error determination flag is a flag for reserving that an error has occurred and shifts to error processing.

  Subsequent to step S568, the specific event detection means 112 determines whether any of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (step S569). If it is determined that none of the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (NO in step S569), the procedure returns to the processing procedure of the outside-use-area interruption processing in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (YES in step S569), the specific event detection unit 112 causes the main CPU 61 to send the command to the sub CPU 71. The "insertion abnormality" of the medal is set to (step S570), and the process returns to the processing procedure of the outside-use-area interrupt process of FIG.

  In step S571, the specific event detection means 112 determines whether or not the E0 error (game medal error) flag is on. When it is determined that the E0 error flag is in the on state (YES in step S571), the error determination flag of the E0 error is cleared, and in step S572, the specific event detection unit 112 outputs the error data with the error code “E0”. Set (Error data flag is set to ON state). The setting of this error data means that the flag of the error data is turned on, and that the flag for shifting to error processing in the main CPU 61 is turned on. Then, the processing returns to the processing procedure of the outside-of-use-area interrupt processing of FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the E0 error flag is not in the on state (NO in step S571), the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether the EA error (sensor error) flag is in the on state (step S573). .. When it is determined that the EA error flag is in the on state (YES in step S573), the error determination flag of the EA error is cleared, and in step S574, the specific event detection unit 112 outputs the error data with the error code “EA”. Set (Error data flag is set to ON state). Then, the processing returns to the processing procedure of the outside-of-use-area interrupt processing of FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the EA error flag is not in the on state (NO in step S573), the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the cancel coil is in the on state (step S575). Although not shown in the drawing, the cancel coil is a credit selector that inserts a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 25 into the hopper unit 43 side in the medal selector 48 to form a credit medal, or ejects the medal into the medal receiver 41. This is for switching the medal passage to enable or disable. The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 25 are adopted as credit medals when the cancel coil is in the on state, and are discharged to the medal receiver 41 when not in the on state.

  When it is determined in the determination process of step S575 that the cancel coil is not in the on state (NO in step S575), the process proceeds to step S567 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the cancel coil is in the ON state (YES in step S575), the specific event detection unit 112 determines that the timing chart of the selector sensor B is in the falling state (the state in which the ON state changes to the OFF state). It is determined whether there is any (step S576). The falling state of the timing chart of the selector sensor B means a state in which a medal is passing in front of the selector sensor B in the passage and is about to pass.

  When it is determined in the determination process of step S576 that the state is the falling state (YES in step S576), the process proceeds to step S577. On the other hand, when it is determined that the state is not the falling state (NO in step S576), the process proceeds to step S579.

  In step S577, the specific event detection means 112 determines whether or not the passing order of medals is abnormal. However, since the selector sensors A, B, and C are arranged to detect the medal passage order in the order of the selector sensor C, the selector sensor A, and the selector sensor B, when the medal is not detected in the order. Is determined to be abnormal.

  If it is determined in the determination process of step S577 that the medal passage order is abnormal (YES in step S577), the process proceeds to step S574 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the order of passing medals is not abnormal (NO in step S577), the specific event detection unit 112 clears (initializes) the EA timer (step S578), and the use area outside interruption in FIG. The procedure returns to the processing procedure.

  In step S579, the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether or not the timing chart of the selector sensor A is in a falling state (a state in which the state shifts from the on state to the off state). The falling state of the timing chart of the selector sensor A means a state in which the medal passes in front of the selector sensor A and is about to pass.

  When it is determined in the determination process of step S579 that the state is not the falling state (NO in step S579), the process proceeds to step S581 of FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the state is the falling state (YES in step S579), the process proceeds to step S580.

  In step S580, the specific event detection means 112 determines whether or not the passing order of medals is abnormal. If it is determined that the order of passing medals is abnormal (YES in step S580), the process proceeds to step S572 in FIG. 36, and if it is determined that the order of passing medals is not abnormal (NO in step S580), the process in FIG. It proceeds to step S585.

  In step S581 of FIG. 38, the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether or not the timing chart of the selector sensor B is in the rising state (transition state from the off state to the on state). The rising state of the timing chart of the selector sensor B means a state in which a medal has moved in front of the selector sensor B in the passage.

  When it is determined in the determination process of step S581 that the timing chart of the selector sensor B is in the rising state (YES in step S581), the process proceeds to step S582. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timing chart of the selector sensor B is not in the rising state (NO in step S581), the process proceeds to step S584.

  In step S582, the specific event detection means 112 determines whether or not the passing order of the medals is abnormal. When it is determined that the order of passing medals is abnormal (YES in step S582), the process proceeds to step S574 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the passage order of the medals is not abnormal (NO in step S582), the specific event detection unit 112 sets the EA timer (step S583), and the processing procedure of the outside-use-area interrupt process in FIG. Return to.

  In step S584, the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether the timing chart of the selector sensor A is in the rising state (step S584). The rising state of the timing chart of the selector sensor A means a state in which a medal has moved in front of the selector sensor A in the passage.

  When it is determined in the determination process of step S584 that the timing chart of the selector sensor A is not in the rising state (NO in step S584), the process proceeds to step S585. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timing chart of the selector sensor A is in the rising state (YES in step S584), the process proceeds to step S586.

  In step S585, the specific event detection means 112 determines whether or not the EA timer has become 0 after a predetermined time (countdown, subtraction) set in advance has elapsed. When it is determined that the EA timer is 0 (YES in step S585), the process proceeds to step S574 in FIG. 36, and when it is determined that the EA timer is not 0 (NO in step S585), FIG. Return to the processing procedure of the used area external interruption processing of.

  In step S586, the specific event detection means 112 determines whether or not 500 ms or more has elapsed since the selector sensor C was turned off. If it is determined that the condition is satisfied (YES in step S586), the process advances to step S572 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the condition is not satisfied (NO in step S586), the process proceeds to step S587.

  In step S587, the specific event detection means 112 determines whether or not the passing order of medals is abnormal. If it is determined that the medal passage order is abnormal based on the detection order of the selector sensors A, B, and C (YES in step S587), the process proceeds to step S572 in FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the passage order of medals is not abnormal (NO in step S587), the specific event detection unit 112 sets the EA timer (step S588), and the processing procedure of the outside-use-area interrupt process in FIG. Return to.

3.3.2 Payout Sensor Monitoring Process The payout sensor monitoring process (step S532) of FIG. 35 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40.

  The specific event detection means 112 determines whether any of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (step S601). When it is determined that none of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating, that is, when it is determined that all the reels have stopped rotating (NO in step S601), the process proceeds to step S604. . On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the left / center / right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (YES in step S601), the process proceeds to step S602.

  In step S602, the specific event detection means 112 determines whether or not the payout sensor A or B is in the ON state. When it is determined that neither the payout sensor A nor the payout sensor B is in the ON state (NO in step S602), the process proceeds to step S604. On the other hand, when it is determined that the payout sensor A or B is in the ON state (YES in step S602), the specific event detection unit 112 sets the medal “payout abnormality” in the transmission command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71. (Step S603), the process proceeds to step S604.

  In step S604, the specific event detection means 112 determines whether or not the E2 error flag as the error determination flag is in the on state. Then, when it is determined that the E2 error flag is in the on state (YES in step S604), the process proceeds to step S605. On the other hand, when it is determined that the E2 error flag is not in the on state, that is, the off state (NO in step S604), the process proceeds to step S608.

  In step S605, the specific event detection unit 112 sets the E2 error flag to the error determination flag. That is, the error determination flag is set to the on state depending on the on state of the E2 error flag.

  Subsequent to step S605, the specific event detection means 112 determines whether any of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (step S606). When it is determined that any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (YES in step S606), the procedure returns to the processing procedure of the used area external interruption processing in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that none of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R is rotating, that is, stopped (NO in step S606), the specific event detection unit 112 causes the E2 error error determination flag. Is cleared, the error code E2 is set to the error data used by the main CPU 61 (step S607), and the procedure returns to the processing procedure of the used area external interruption processing of FIG.

  In step S608, the specific event detection means 112 determines whether or not the determination time of the error code E7 has just passed. When it is determined that the determination time of the error code E7 has just passed (YES in step S608), the process proceeds to step S609. On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination time of the error code E7 has not elapsed (NO in step S608), the process proceeds to step S612.

  In step S609, the specific event detection means 112 determines whether or not the hopper unit 43 is being driven. Specifically, it is determined whether the hopper motor 57 is rotationally driven. When it is determined that the hopper unit 43 is being driven (YES in step S609), the process proceeds to step S610. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hopper unit 43 is not being driven (NO in step S609), the process proceeds to step S612.

  In step S610, the specific event detection means 112 determines whether or not the payout sensor B is in the ON state. When it is determined that the payout sensor B is in the on state (YES in step S610), the process proceeds to step S612. On the other hand, when it is determined that the payout sensor B is not in the ON state (NO in step S610), the specific event detection unit 112 sets error data used in the main CPU 61 with the error code “E7” (step S611). The procedure returns to the processing procedure of the used area external interruption processing of FIG.

  In step S612, the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether or not the payout sensor A or B is in the ON state. When it is determined that the payout sensors A and B are not in the ON state (NO in step S612), the process proceeds to step S616 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the payout sensor A or B is in the on state (YES in step S612), the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the hopper unit 43 is being driven, specifically, the hopper motor. It is determined whether or not 57 is rotationally driven (step S613).

  When it is determined in the determination process of step S613 that the hopper unit 43 is not being driven (NO in step S613), the process proceeds to step S605. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hopper unit 43 is being driven (YES in step S613), the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether the payout sensor A is in the rising state (transition state from the off state to the on state). It is determined (step S614). When it is determined to be in the rising state (YES in step S614), the specific event detection unit 112 sets the E1 timer (starts countdown (clocking) of the E1 timer) (step S615), and the usage area in FIG. Return to the processing procedure of external interrupt processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the state is not the rising state (NO in step S614), the process proceeds to step S616 in FIG.

  In step S616 of FIG. 40, the specific event detection means 112 determines whether or not the hopper unit 43 is being driven, specifically, whether or not the hopper motor 57 is being rotationally driven. When it is determined that the hopper unit 43 is not being driven (NO in step S616), the procedure returns to the processing procedure of the outside-use-area interrupt processing of FIG.

  When it is determined that the hopper unit 43 is being driven (YES in step S616), the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether both the payout sensors A and B are in the off state after the determination time of the error code E7 has elapsed. Is determined (step S617). If both are determined to be in the off state (YES in step S617), the process proceeds to step S622. On the other hand, when it is determined that both are not in the off state, that is, at least one is in the on state (NO in step S617), the specific event detecting unit 112 causes the E1 timer to elapse a predetermined time (countdown (subtract)). Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining time is 0 (step S618). When it is determined that the E1 timer is 0 (YES in step S618), the process proceeds to step S622.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the E1 timer is not 0 (NO in step S618), the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether the payout sensor A is in a falling state (a state in which the on-state changes to the off-state). It is determined whether or not (step S619). If it is determined that it is not in the falling state (NO in step S619), the procedure returns to the processing procedure of the outside-use-area interrupt processing of FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is in the falling state (YES in step S619), the specific event detection unit 112 clears (initializes) the E1 timer (step S620). Then, the specific event detection unit 112 causes the payout sensor B to fall while the payout sensor A is in a rising state (a state in which the off state changes to the on state) and in a falling state (a state in which the on state changes to the off state). It is determined whether or not a state (a state of transitioning from the on state to the off state) has occurred (step S621). If it is determined that the falling state has occurred (YES in step S621), the procedure returns to the processing procedure of the outside-use-area interrupt processing of FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the falling state has not occurred (NO in step S621), the process proceeds to step S622.

  In step S622, the specific event detection unit 112 sets error data used by the main CPU 61 with the error code "E1" (step S622). Then, the processing returns to the processing procedure of the outside-of-use-area interrupt processing of FIG.

3.3.3 Door Monitoring Process The door monitoring process (step S533) in FIG. 35 will be described with reference to FIG. However, the door monitoring process of FIG. 41 is a process executed by the main CPU 61.

  It is determined by the monitor hold timer of the door (front door 5) whether a predetermined time has elapsed (step S631). If it is determined that the time has not elapsed (NO in step S631), the process returns to the processing procedure of the outside-use-area interrupt process of FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time has elapsed (YES in step S631), the state of the door (front door 5) is acquired (step S632).

  Following step S632, it is determined whether the state of the acquired door (front door 5) is different from the previously acquired door (front door 5) information (step S633). If it is determined that the information does not differ from the information (NO in step S633), the procedure returns to the processing procedure of the external use area interrupt processing in FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the information is different from the information (YES in step S633), the state of the door (front door 5) is updated (step S634). Then, the door (front door 5) state is set in the transmission command for transmission from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 (step S635). Then, the door (front door 5) monitoring hold timer is set (step S636). Then, the processing returns to the processing procedure of the outside-of-use-area interrupt processing of FIG.

3.3.4 Ratio Display Related Timer Update Process The ratio display related timer update process (step S534) of FIG. 35 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The display control means 115 performs an update process of subtracting 1 from the ratio blinking timer (step S651). Subsequently, the display control unit 115 determines whether or not the update result (value of the updated ratio blinking timer) is 0 or more (step S652). Then, when it is determined that the update result is 0 or more (YES in step S652), the process proceeds to step S654. On the other hand, when it is determined that the update result is not 0 or more (NO in step S652), the display control unit 115 inverts the ratio blinking flag and causes the ratio blinking timer to set the set value of the ratio blinking timer in step S55 in FIG. The same value is set (step S653), and the process proceeds to step S654. The processing from step S651 to step S653 is executed every time the use area external interruption processing in the timer interruption processing is performed, and the ratio blinking flag is set to 0 and 1 every 0.3 seconds, for example, according to the set value of the ratio blinking timer. Switch between. As a result, a part of the ratio indicator 69 that can be turned on (in the present embodiment, a turnable part DP (dot portion) at each of the ones digit, the tens digit, and the thousands digit) can be turned on. The blinking display can be controlled.

  In step S654, the display control unit 115 performs an update process of subtracting 1 from the display switching timer (step S654). Subsequently, the display control unit 115 determines whether the update result is 0 or more (step S655). When it is determined that the update result of the display switching timer (the value of the updated display switching timer) is 0 or more (YES in step S655), the process proceeds to step S657. On the other hand, when it is determined that the update result is not 0 or more (NO in step S655), the display control unit 115 updates the ratio display number and causes the display switch timer to set the display switch timer set value in step S54 in FIG. The same value as is set (step S656), and the process proceeds to step S657. In the updating process of the ratio display number, the ratio display number is updated by repeating 0 to 4 in order such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 0, 1, .... The ratio display number 0 is the display item (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the ratio display number 1 is the display item (2) Continuous character ratio (6000 games), and the ratio display number 2 is the display item (3) character. The ratio (6000 games), the ratio display number 3 corresponds to the display item (4) continuous character ratio (total), and the ratio display number 4 corresponds to the display item (5) character ratio (total) (see FIG. 12). Then, the processing of steps S654 to S656 is executed every time the use area external interruption processing in the timer interruption processing is performed, and the ratio display number is updated, for example, every 5 seconds according to the set value of the display switching timer. . As a result, the display contents of the ratio indicator 69 are as follows: display item (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative), display item (2) continuous character ratio (6000 games), display item (3) character ratio (6000 games). , The display item (4) continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) and (5) accessory ratio (cumulative) are repeated in this order.

  The display control unit 115 performs an update process of subtracting 1 from the dot blinking timer (step S657). Subsequently, the display control unit 115 determines whether the update result (the value of the dot blinking timer after the update) is 0 or more (step S658). When it is determined that the update result is 0 or more (YES in step S658), the process returns to the processing procedure of the used area external interruption processing in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the update result is not 0 or more (NO in step S658), the display control unit 115 reverses the dot blinking flag and causes the dot blinking timer to set the dot blinking timer set value in step S56 in FIG. The same value as is set (step S659), and the process returns to the processing procedure of the used area external interruption processing of FIG. The processing from step S657 to step S659 is executed every time the use area external interruption processing in the timer interruption processing is performed, and the dot blinking flags 0 and 1 are set, for example, every 0.1 seconds according to the set value of the dot blinking timer. Switch between. Accordingly, it is possible to control the blinking display of a part of the ratio indicator 69 that can be lighted (in the present embodiment, the lightable parts DP (dot portions) of the ones digit, the tens digit, and the thousands digit). Become.

3.3.5 Each Ratio Calculation The each ratio calculation (step S535) of FIG. 35 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The calculation means 114b determines whether or not the ratio calculation count is 0 (step S671). When it is determined that the number of times of ratio calculation is 0 (YES in step S671), all of the types of ratios corresponding to the number of times of ratio calculation finally set in the game information totaling process of FIG. 26 are calculated. Therefore, the processing returns to the processing procedure of the outside-use-area interruption processing of FIG. That is, in the game information totaling process of FIG. 26, when the ratio calculation number is finally set to 1, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) has already been calculated, and when the ratio calculation number is set to 5, the accessory character The ratio (cumulative), continuous character ratio (total), character ratio (6000 games), continuous character ratio (6000 games), and advantageous section ratio (total) have already been calculated.

  When it is determined that the number of times of ratio calculation is not 0 (NO in step S671), the calculation unit 114b performs the update process of subtracting 1 from the number of times of ratio calculation (step S672). Then, the calculation means 114b acquires the data corresponding to the value of the ratio calculation frequency from the ratio calculation data table (step S673).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the ratio calculation data table associates "ratio calculation count", "divisor information", "divisor byte count", "dividend information", and "dividend byte count" with each other. It is a table to be stored.

  Then, as data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “0”, information on the divisor “total number of games” (total total number of games in FIG. 10), number of bytes of the divisor “4”, information on the dividend “number of advantageous zone games”. “(Number of advantageous section games in total accumulated in FIG. 10) and the number of bytes of the dividend“ 4 ”are stored in association with each other. Then, the number of bytes "4" of the dividend obtained is set as the number of repetitions in the 100-fold processing described later with reference to FIG.

  As data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “1”, divisor information “total payout number in the latest 6000 games” (total payout number of cumulative PS in FIG. 10), divisor byte number “3”, dividend information “latest 6000”. The number of consecutive winnings payout in the game (the number of consecutive winnings payout of cumulative PS in FIG. 10) and the number of bytes of the dividend “3” are stored in association with each other. Then, the number of bytes “3” of the dividend to be acquired is set as the number of repetitions in the 100-fold processing described later with reference to FIG.

  As data corresponding to the ratio calculation count “2”, divisor information “total payout number in the last 6000 games” (total payout number of cumulative PS in FIG. 10), divisor byte number “3”, dividend information “latest 6000”. The number of bonus payouts in the game (the number of bonus payouts of the cumulative PS in FIG. 10) and the number of bytes of the dividend “3” are stored in association with each other. Then, the number of bytes “3” of the dividend to be acquired is set as the number of repetitions in the 100-fold processing described later with reference to FIG.

  As data corresponding to the ratio calculation count “3”, the divisor information “total payout number in cumulative game” (total cumulative payout number in FIG. 10), divisor byte number “4”, dividend information “cumulative game The continuous prize payout number "(the total cumulative continuous prize payout number in FIG. 10) and the byte number" 4 "of the dividend are stored in association with each other. Then, the number of bytes "4" of the dividend obtained is set as the number of repetitions in the 100-fold processing described later with reference to FIG.

  As data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “4”, the divisor information “total payout number in cumulative game” (total cumulative payout number in FIG. 10), divisor byte number “4”, dividend information “cumulative game number” The number of bonus payouts (the total number of bonus payouts in FIG. 10) and the number of bytes of the dividend “4” are stored in association with each other. Then, the number of bytes “4” of the dividend obtained is set as the number of repetitions in the 100-fold processing described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to step S673, the calculation unit 114b performs a ratio calculation process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 44, for calculating the ratio corresponding to the value of the ratio calculation count (step S674). However, the ratio corresponding to the ratio calculation count “0” is the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the ratio corresponding to the ratio calculation count “1” is the continuous role ratio (6000 games), and the ratio calculation count “2”. The ratio corresponding to is the character ratio (6000 games), the ratio corresponding to the ratio calculation count "3" is the continuous character ratio (cumulative), and the ratio corresponding to the ratio calculation count "4" is the character ratio. (Cumulative). This ratio calculation process reduces the calculation load when the divisor and dividend can exceed 2 bytes, so it should be applied when the divisor and dividend can exceed 2 bytes. Is preferred.

  Subsequent to step S674, the calculation means 114b sets the value stored in the ratio display work area (described later) by the ratio calculation processing of step S674 in the ratio buffer corresponding to the number of times of ratio calculation (step S675), and FIG. Return to the processing procedure of the used area external interruption processing of. However, the ratio buffer corresponding to the ratio calculation count "0" is a buffer for the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the advantageous section ratio of the total accumulation in FIG. 10). Further, the ratio buffer corresponding to the ratio calculation count “1” is a buffer for the continuous character ratio (6000 games) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the continuous character ratio of the cumulative PS in FIG. 10). The ratio buffer corresponding to the number of times “2” is a buffer for the character ratio (6000 games) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the character ratio of the cumulative PS in FIG. 10). Further, the ratio buffer corresponding to the ratio calculation number "3" is a buffer for continuous character ratio (cumulative) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the total character number of continuous character ratios in FIG. 10). The ratio buffer corresponding to "4" is a buffer for the character ratio (total) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the total character ratio in FIG. 10).

  Here, before describing the details of the ratio calculation process (step S674) of FIG. 43 using the flowchart of FIG. 44 and the like, an outline of the ratio calculation process (step S674) of FIG. 43 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 58. A specific example will be described. The least significant bit is described as the 0th bit, and the least significant byte is described as the 1st byte.

  In this specific example, as shown in FIG. 52, both the divisor A and the dividend B are 4-byte information, the divisor A is $ 000B71B0 in hexadecimal notation (750000 in decimal notation), and the dividend B is in hexadecimal notation. Is $ 000130B0 (78000 in decimal notation). However, as shown in FIG. 52, the arithmetic work area from the 1st byte to the 5th byte and the A register (only 1 bit for auxiliary operation) are used to store the divisor in the 1st to 4th bytes of the divisor RWM. ing. The dividend RWM in which the dividend is stored is not shown.

  The ratio (percentage) (%) of the divisor A to the dividend B is calculated by dividing the dividend B by the divisor A and multiplying the division result (B ÷ A) by 100 (B ÷ A × 100). In the present embodiment, in consideration of the complicated arithmetic processing of the decimal point, the dividend B is multiplied by 100, and the result of multiplication by 100 (B × 100) is divided by the divisor A (B × 100 ÷ A). ..

  First, the process of multiplying the dividend B by 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 53 illustrates a method of writing 78000 × 100 in decimal.

  The first byte value $ B0 (hexadecimal notation) of the dividend B is multiplied by $ 64 (hexadecimal notation), and the high-order byte $ 44 (hexadecimal notation) of the multiplication result $ 44C0 (hexadecimal notation) is registered in the H register. Then, the lower byte $ C0 (hexadecimal notation) is stored in the L register. Then, $ 44 (hexadecimal notation) of the H register is stored in the D register, and $ C0 (hexadecimal notation) of the L register is stored in the first byte of the operation work area.

  Subsequently, the value of the second byte of dividend B, $ 30 (hexadecimal notation), is multiplied by $ 64 (hexadecimal notation), and the multiplication result $ 12C0 (hexadecimal notation) is the upper byte $ 12 (hexadecimal notation). Is stored in the H register, and the lower byte $ C0 (hexadecimal notation) is stored in the L register. Then, $ C0 (hexadecimal notation) of the L register and $ 44 (hexadecimal notation) of the D register are added, and the lower byte of the addition result, $ 04 (hexadecimal notation), is added to the second byte of the operation work area. Store, add $ 01 (hexadecimal notation) for the carry to $ 12 (hexadecimal notation) in the H register, and store the addition result $ 13 (hexadecimal notation) in the D register.

  Next, multiply the value of the third byte of dividend B by $ 01 (hexadecimal notation) by $ 64 (hexadecimal notation), and multiply the result $ 0064 (hexadecimal notation) by the upper byte $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) Is stored in the H register and the lower byte $ 64 (hexadecimal notation) is stored in the L register. Then, $ 64 (hexadecimal notation) of the L register and $ 13 (hexadecimal notation) of the D register are added, and the lower byte of the addition result, $ 77 (hexadecimal notation), is added to the third byte of the operation work area. Store, and store $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) of the H register in the D register.

  Subsequently, the value of the fourth byte of dividend B, $ 00 (hexadecimal notation), is multiplied by $ 64 (hexadecimal notation), and the multiplication result $ 0000 (hexadecimal notation), the upper byte $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) Is stored in the H register and the lower byte $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) is stored in the L register. Then, $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) of the L register and $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) of the D register are added, and the lower byte of the addition result, $ 00 (hexadecimal notation), is added to the fourth byte of the operation work area. Store, and store $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) of the H register in the D register.

  Then, since all bytes of the dividend B are multiplied by $ 64 (hexadecimal notation), the value of the D register is stored in the fifth byte of the operation work area.

  As described above, in the case of hexadecimal multiplication, calculation is performed in 1-byte units based on the same idea of writing system as decimal numbers. The dividend B is multiplied by 100 in sequence from the first byte (multiplication of $ 64 in hexadecimal notation), and the operation result of 2 bytes is shifted by 1 byte and added, thereby multiplying multiple bytes by 100 ($ in hexadecimal notation). 64 multiplications). At this time, since the maximum operation result is $ FF × $ 64 = $ 639C (hexadecimal notation), overflow does not occur when adding carry amounts. The addition result is stored in the operation work area in order from the first byte, and the operation result is obtained by adding 1 to the operation byte number.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 to 58, a process of dividing a value (B × 100) obtained by multiplying the dividend B by 100 by the divisor A will be described.

  Here, when the dividend B is less than or equal to the divisor A, when the dividend B is multiplied by 100 and the result of multiplying by 100 (B × 100) is divided by the divisor A, the quotient is always 100 (decimal notation) or less. Therefore, in binary notation, the quotient is a 1-byte value and the 7th bit is always 0. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 54, in decimal notation, the hundreds, the tens, and the ones (that is, the part marked with “*” in FIG. 54) may be calculated as the quotient value. In binary notation, 7 bits from the 6th bit to the 0th bit (that is, the part of "*" in FIG. 54) may be calculated as the value of the quotient. More specifically, in decimal notation, when obtaining the value of the quotient, in the binary notation, the value of the quotient can be calculated from the hundreds digit to the ones digit. It is sufficient to calculate from the 6th bit and to the 0th bit.

  In decimal notation, when calculating the value of the hundreds of the quotient, as shown in FIG. 55, “78000” is taken out as the subtraction determination part, and as shown in FIG. 56, the subtraction determination part “78000” is divided by the divisor “750,000”. Find the hundreds value of the quotient by comparing with.

  Similarly, in binary notation, when calculating the value of the 6th bit of the quotient, as shown in FIG. 55, the part necessary for calculating the value of the 6th bit of the quotient is the subtraction judgment part (A register). Bit value from the 5th byte to the 1st byte of the operation work area is shifted to the left (upper bit side) by 2 bits in order to shift the least significant bit and the 5th byte to the 2nd byte of the operation work area. To do. As a result, the subtraction judgment part (from the 5th byte to the 2nd byte of the A register and the operation work area) is changed from the 6th bit in the 5th byte of the operation work area before the 2 bit shift to the 6th bit in the 1st byte of the operation work area. Up to the bit.

  However, the result of multiplying the 4-byte maximum value $ FFFFFFFF (hexadecimal number notation) by 100 is $ 63FFFFFF9C (hexadecimal number notation), and in binary number notation, 01100011 11111111 11111111 11111111 10011100. In this way, since the most significant bit of the 5th byte in binary notation is 0, even when shifting the 5th byte to the 1st byte of the operation work area by 2 bits, only the least significant bit of the A register is If used, the result (B × 100) of the dividend B multiplied by 100 will not be lost.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 56, the subtraction determination portion (the least significant bit of the A register and the fifth byte to the second byte of the operation work area) is compared with the divisor to calculate the sixth bit of the quotient. If subtraction is possible, "1" is set, and if subtraction is not possible, "0" is the 6th bit of the quotient.

  In this specific example, as shown in FIG. 56, the subtraction determination part “0 0000000000 00000001 11011100 00010011” is compared with the divisor “00000000 0000101111 01110001 1010000”, and the divisor cannot be subtracted from the subtraction determination part. Becomes "1", and "0" obtained by inverting the carry flag is stored in the sixth bit of the ratio display work area as the value of the sixth bit of the quotient. When this subtraction is not possible, the value of the subtraction determination portion (the fifth byte to the second byte of the calculation work area) is left unchanged.

  If the divisor can be subtracted from the subtraction determination portion, the carry flag becomes "0", and "1" obtained by inverting the carry flag is used as the value of the 6th bit of the quotient, and the value of the work area for ratio display 6 Remember the bit. When the subtraction is possible, the value of the fifth byte to the second byte of the calculation work area is replaced with the value obtained by subtracting the value of the divisor from the value of the subtraction determination part.

  Next, the value of the fifth bit of the quotient in binary notation is calculated. Here, in the case of calculating the tens place in decimal notation, as shown in FIG. 57, the work of lowering the tens place "0" of 7800000 is performed. Similarly, when the fifth bit of the quotient in binary notation is calculated, the work of lowering the fifth bit of the dividend B × 100 is performed. Specifically, in binary notation, when calculating the value of the fifth bit of the quotient, the part required for calculating the value of the fifth bit of the quotient is the subtraction judgment part (the least significant bit of the A register and the In order to shift from the 5th byte to the 2nd byte of the work area, the bit values from the 5th byte to the 1st byte of the operation work area are shifted to the left (higher bit side) by 1 bit. As a result, the subtraction determination part (from the 5th byte to the 2nd byte of the A register and the operation work area) is changed from the 7th bit in the 5th byte of the operation work area before 1 bit shift to the 7th bit in the 1st byte of the operation work area. Up to the bit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 57, the subtraction determination portion (the least significant bit of the A register and the fifth byte to the second byte of the operation work area) is compared with the divisor to calculate the fifth bit of the quotient. If subtraction is possible, "1" is set, and if subtraction is not possible, "0" is the fifth bit of the quotient.

  In this specific example, as shown in FIG. 57, the subtraction determination part “0 0000000000 00000011 10111000 00100110” is compared with the divisor “00000000 0000001111 01110001 101100000”, and the divisor cannot be subtracted from the subtraction determination part. Becomes "1", and "0" obtained by inverting the carry flag is stored in the fifth bit of the ratio display work area as the value of the fifth bit of the quotient. When this subtraction is not possible, the value of the subtraction determination portion (the fifth byte to the second byte of the calculation work area) is left unchanged.

  When the divisor can be subtracted from the subtraction determination part, the carry flag becomes "0", and "1" obtained by inverting the carry flag is used as the value of the fifth bit of the quotient to set the ratio display work area to 5. Remember the bit. When the subtraction is possible, the value of the fifth byte to the second byte of the calculation work area is replaced with the value obtained by subtracting the value of the divisor from the value of the subtraction determination part.

  Similarly, the value of the 4th bit, the 3rd bit, the 2nd bit, the 1st bit, and the 0th bit of the quotient is calculated.

  The result of this calculation is shown in FIG. In this way, the shift processing (digit lowering processing) and the subtraction determination are repeated 7 times from the upper byte of the first byte of the operation work area to derive the 6th bit to the 0th bit of the quotient. Finally, the value of the ratio display work area becomes the quotient, and the value from the 5th byte to the 2nd byte of the calculation work area becomes the remainder.

  When the remainder is not 0, it is determined that the result of division is larger than the value of the quotient and smaller than the value obtained by adding 1 (value in binary notation) to the quotient, and when the remainder is 0, the division is performed. It can be used to determine that the result is the same as the quotient value.

  The divisor A is a value that can exceed 2 bytes, the dividend B is a value that can exceed 2 bytes, and when the value of the dividend B is equal to or less than the value of the divisor A, the calculating unit 114b causes the divisor of the value of the dividend B to be divisor. It has a function of calculating the ratio (percentage) to the value of A, performs a multiplication process that multiplies the value of the dividend B by 100, and holds the result of the multiplication process (value of B × 100) in the calculation work area. , When the value of the dividend B × 100 is divided by the value of the divisor A, the division process is performed to calculate only the lower 7 bits as the quotient, and the result of the division process (the value of B × 100 ÷ A) is displayed for the ratio display. Keep in work area. In the division processing, the calculating means 114b calculates each of the bit values from the 6th bit to the 0th bit in the lower 7 bits as 1 when the subtracted value is greater than or equal to the subtracted value, and when the subtracted value is less than the subtracted value. Is calculated as 0. When the value of the divisor A is K (K is a natural number) bits, the subtraction value is a value represented by K bits from the (K-1) th bit to the 0th bit of the value of the divisor A, and is 6 bits. The subtracted value in the eye is a value represented by (K + 1) bits from the (K + 6) th bit to the 6th bit of the value of the dividend B × 100, and the subtracted value in the i (i = 0 to 5) th bit When the value of the (i + 1) th bit in the division result obtained by dividing the value of the dividend B × 100 by the value of the divisor A is 0, the lower K bits of the subtracted value at the (i + 1) th bit are set. It is a value represented by (K + 1) bits in which the i-th bit of the value of the dividend B × 100 is the least significant bit as well as the upper K bits, and the value of the dividend B × 100 is divided by the value of the divisor A. When the value of the (i + 1) th bit in the division result is 1, the lower K bits of the value obtained by subtracting the subtraction value from the subtracted value of the (i + 1) th bit are set as the upper K bits, and the dividend B It is a value represented by (K + 1) bits with the i-th bit of the value of × 100 being the least significant bit.

  Subsequently, the outline of the ratio calculation process (step S674) in FIG. 43 will be described with reference to FIG. 59 with another specific example. However, in the specific example of FIG. 59, the divisor A is 0 (decimal notation) and the dividend B is 0 (decimal notation).

Value of dividend B is $ 00000000
The multiplication result obtained by multiplying (hexadecimal notation) by 100 is $ 0000000000 (hexadecimal notation).

  First, the value of the 6th bit of the quotient in binary notation is calculated. In binary notation, when calculating the value of the 6th bit of the quotient, as shown in FIG. 59, the part necessary for calculating the value of the 6th bit of the quotient is the subtraction determination part (the least significant bit of the A register). In order to shift from the 5th byte to the 2nd byte of the calculation work area, the bit values from the 5th byte to the 1st byte of the calculation work area are shifted to the left (upper bit side) by 2 bits. As a result, the subtraction judgment part (from the 5th byte to the 2nd byte of the A register and the operation work area) is changed from the 6th bit in the 5th byte of the operation work area before the 2 bit shift to the 6th bit in the 1st byte of the operation work area. Up to the bit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59, the subtraction determination part (the least significant bit of the A register and the fifth byte to the second byte of the operation work area) is compared with the divisor to calculate the sixth bit of the quotient. If subtraction is possible, "1" is set, and if subtraction is not possible, "0" is the 6th bit of the quotient.

  In this specific example, as shown in FIG. 59, the subtraction determination part "0 0000000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000" and the divisor "0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000" can be compared, and the divisor can be subtracted from the subtraction determination part. Becomes "0", and "1" obtained by inverting the carry flag is stored in the sixth bit of the ratio display work area as the value of the sixth bit of the quotient. When the subtraction is possible, the value of the fifth byte to the second byte of the calculation work area is replaced with the value obtained by subtracting the value of the divisor from the value of the subtraction determination part.

  Next, the value of the fifth bit of the quotient in binary notation is calculated. When calculating the 5th bit of the quotient in binary notation, the part required to calculate the value of the 5th bit of the quotient is the subtraction judgment part (the least significant bit of the A register and the 5th byte of the work area for calculation). To the second byte), the bit value from the fifth byte to the first byte of the operation work area is shifted to the left (higher bit side) by 1 bit. As a result, the subtraction determination part (from the 5th byte to the 2nd byte of the A register and the operation work area) is changed from the 7th bit in the 5th byte of the operation work area before 1 bit shift to the 7th bit in the 1st byte of the operation work area. Up to the bit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59, the subtraction determination portion (the least significant bit of the A register and the fifth byte to the second byte of the operation work area) is compared with the divisor to calculate the fifth bit of the quotient. If subtraction is possible, "1" is set, and if subtraction is not possible, "0" is the fifth bit of the quotient.

  In this specific example, as shown in FIG. 59, the subtraction determination part "0 0000000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000" and the divisor "0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000" can be compared, and the divisor can be subtracted from the subtraction determination part. Becomes "0", and "1" with the carry flag inverted is stored in the fifth bit of the ratio display work area as the fifth bit of the quotient. When the subtraction is possible, the value of the fifth byte to the second byte of the calculation work area is replaced with the value obtained by subtracting the value of the divisor from the value of the subtraction determination part.

  Similarly, the value of the 4th bit, the 3rd bit, the 2nd bit, the 1st bit, and the 0th bit of the quotient is calculated. As a result of this calculation, as shown in FIG. 59, the quotient value is 01111111 in binary notation, $ 7F in hexadecimal notation, and 127 in decimal notation. The remainder is 00000000 in binary notation, $ 00 in hexadecimal notation, and 0 in decimal notation.

  As described above, when the value of the dividend B is less than or equal to the value of the divisor A, considering that the ratio (percentage) of the dividend B to the divisor A is 100 or less in decimal notation, the quotient is as shown in FIG. If it exceeds 100 in decimal notation, the ratio display work area is cleared and the value is set to 0.

3.3.5.1 Ratio Calculation Process The ratio calculation process (step S674) of FIG. 43 will be described with reference to FIG. However, when the ratio calculation count is 0, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is calculated, when the ratio calculation count is 1, the continuous character ratio (6000 games) is calculated, and when the ratio calculation count is 2. Character ratio (6000 games) is calculated. When the number of ratio calculations is 3, the continuous character ratio (cumulative) is calculated, and when the number of ratio calculations is 4, the character ratio (total) is calculated. It

  The calculation means 114b clears the fifth byte of the calculation work area (see FIG. 52) and the ratio display work area to set the value to 0 (step S701).

  The calculating means 114b multiplies the value (RWM value) of the RWM 65 corresponding to the information of the dividend acquired in step S673 of FIG. 43 by 100, and performs the 100-fold processing described in detail later with reference to FIG. 45 (step S702). However, when the ratio calculation count is 0, the value of the total cumulative advantageous zone game count of FIG. 10 is multiplied by 100, and when the ratio calculation count is 1, the value of the continuous PS payout number of the cumulative PS of FIG. 10 is 100. 10 is multiplied by 100 when the ratio calculation count is 2, and when the ratio calculation count is 3, the total cumulative continuous accessory payout count value in FIG. When the ratio is calculated 100 times and the number of times the ratio is calculated is 4, the value of the total cumulative number of accessory payouts in FIG. 10 is multiplied by 100.

  The calculating means 114b acquires the first byte and the second byte of the RWM 65 corresponding to the divisor information acquired in step S673 of FIG. 43 (step S703). Then, the calculation means 114b determines whether or not the number of calculation bytes is 3 (step S704). In this embodiment, the number of operation bytes is 3 or 4. When it is determined that the number of calculated bytes is not 3, that is, the number of calculated bytes is 4 (NO in step S704), the calculation unit 114b acquires the fourth byte of the divisor RWM (step S705), and the divisor. The third byte of RWM is acquired (step S706), and the process proceeds to step S707. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of operation bytes is 3 (YES in step S704), the operation unit 114b acquires the third byte of the divisor RWM (step S706) and proceeds to step S707.

  However, the divisor RWM is a 4-byte storage area for storing the total number of games in the total accumulation shown in FIG. 10 when the ratio calculation count is 0, and when the ratio calculation count is 1, the total payout of cumulative PS in FIG. 10 is a 3-byte storage area for storing the number of sheets, and is a 3-byte storage area for storing the total payout number of cumulative PS in FIG. 10 when the ratio calculation count is 2, and when the ratio calculation count is 3, FIG. Is a 4-byte storage area for storing the total cumulative total number of paid-out sheets, and when the ratio calculation count is 4, it is a 4-byte storage area for storing the total total number of paid-out sheets of FIG.

  The calculation unit 114b sets the number of repetitions to 7 (step S707). The reason for setting the number of repetitions to 7 is as follows. In the ratio calculation, the value of the dividend is less than or equal to the value of the divisor, and the value obtained by multiplying the value of the dividend by 100 is divided by the value of the divisor, so the value of the quotient is 100 or less in decimal notation, and the value in binary notation is It can be represented by the lower 7 bits (7 bits from the 0th bit to the 6th bit). Therefore, it is necessary to calculate only the lower 7 bits from the 0th bit to the 6th bit in binary notation as the value of the quotient.

  When the number of repetitions is 7, which is set in step S707, the calculation means 114b shifts the data to be the subtraction determination part from the 5th byte to the 2nd byte of the A register and the calculation work area. The shift process described in detail later is performed twice (steps S708 and S709). This is a process corresponding to a 2-bit shift when calculating the value of the 6th bit of the quotient in FIG.

  Further, when the number of repetitions is 1 to 6 other than 7 set in step S707 (when it is determined that the number of repetitions is not 0 in step S718, which will be described later), the calculation unit 114b outputs the data to be the subtraction determination part. A shift process for shifting from the 5th byte to the 2nd byte of the A register and the operation work area, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 46, is performed once (step S709). This is a process corresponding to a 1-bit shift when calculating the value of the fifth bit of the quotient of FIG. 57, for example.

  Subsequent to step S709, the arithmetic means 114b stores the number of repetitions and the divisor in the RWM 65 (step S710).

  Subsequent to step S710, the calculation means 114b calculates the divisor from the data of the subtraction determination portion (the data from the 5th byte to the 2nd byte of the A register and the calculation work area) (from the 4th byte to the 1st byte of the divisor RWM). (Data up to) is subtracted, and a subtraction process described in detail later with reference to FIG. 47 is performed (step S711). When the number of bytes of the divisor is 3 bytes (for example, the total payout number of cumulative PS in FIG. 10), the value of the fourth byte of the divisor RWM is $ 00 (hexadecimal notation).

  In step S712, the calculation means 114b determines whether the calculation result of step S711 is a carry-on (step S712). When it is determined that the calculation result is the carry-on (that is, the data of the subtraction determination part is not more than the data of the divisor) (YES in step S712), the process proceeds to step S714. On the other hand, when it is determined that the calculation result is not the carry-on (that is, when the data of the subtraction determination part is the data of the divisor or more) (NO in step S712), the calculation unit 114b calculates the calculation result of step S711 (the subtraction determination part). The result of subtracting the data of the divisor from the data of 1) is set from the 5th byte to the 2nd byte of the operation work area (step S713), and the process proceeds to step S714.

  In step S714, the arithmetic means 114b inverts the carry flag. However, when the data of the divisor can be subtracted from the data of the subtraction determination part (that is, when the data of the subtraction determination part is equal to or more than the data of the divisor), the value of the carry flag becomes 0 and the value obtained by inverting the value of the carry flag. Is 1. If the divisor data cannot be subtracted from the subtraction determination data (that is, if the subtraction determination data is less than or equal to the divisor data), the carry flag value is 1, and the carry flag value is the inverted value. It becomes 0.

  Subsequent to step S714, the arithmetic means 114b rotates the 8 bits of the ratio display work area to the left (upper bit side) by 1 bit and stores the inverted value of the carry flag at the 0th bit (step S715). ). Note that, for example, when the number of repetitions is 7, the value stored in the 0th bit is rotated 6 times from the number of repetitions 6 to 1 by 1 bit to the left, and when the number of repetitions becomes 0, the ratio is displayed. Will be stored in the 6th bit of the work area. Also, for example, when the number of repetitions is 6, the value stored in the 0th bit is rotated 5 times from the number of repetitions 5 to 1 by 1 bit to the left, and when the number of repetitions becomes 0, the ratio is displayed. Will be stored in the 5th bit of the work area.

  Following step S715, the calculation unit 114b restores the number of repetitions and the divisor RWM (step S716). Then, the calculation unit 114b performs an update process of subtracting 1 from the number of repetitions (step S717), and determines whether the number of repetitions is 0 (step S718). When it is determined that the number of repetitions is not 0 (NO in step S718), the process proceeds to step S709.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of repetitions is 0 (YES in step S718), the calculation unit 114b determines whether the value of the ratio display work area is greater than 100 (step S719). If it is determined that the value of the ratio display work area is not greater than 100 (NO in step S719), the process returns to the process of calculating each ratio in FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the ratio display work area is greater than 100 (YES in step S719), the ratio does not exceed 100, and therefore it is determined that the ratio has not been calculated correctly. The work area is cleared and the value is set to 0 (step S720), and the process returns to the process of calculating each ratio in FIG.

3.3.5.1.1 100-fold processing The 100-fold processing (step S702) in FIG. 44 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The calculation means 114b sets the initial value and acquires the RWM address of the calculation work area (step S731). Here, as the initial value setting, the number of bytes of the dividend obtained in step S673 of FIG. 43 is set as the number of repetitions. Specifically, when the number of times of ratio calculation is 0, the number of bytes of the dividend is "4" (the number of bytes of the storage area for storing the total number of advantageous section games in FIG. 10 is "4") is set as the number of repetitions. .. When the number of times of ratio calculation is 1, the number of bytes of the dividend is "3" (the number of bytes of the storage area for storing the number of consecutive PS payouts of the cumulative PS shown in FIG. 10 is "3") is set as the number of repetitions. When the number of times of ratio calculation is 2, the number of bytes of the dividend is “3” (the number of bytes of the storage area for storing the number of payout characters of the cumulative PS in FIG. 10 is “3”) is set as the number of repetitions. When the ratio calculation count is 3, the number of bytes of the dividend is "4" (the number of bytes of the storage area for storing the total cumulative number of consecutive accessory payouts in FIG. 10 is "4") is set as the number of repetitions. When the ratio calculation number is 4, the number of bytes of the dividend is "4" (the number of bytes of the storage area for storing the total cumulative number of payouts of the accessory in FIG. 10 is "4") is set as the number of repetitions.

  Then, the calculating means 114b acquires the 1-byte value of the dividend RWM address (step S732). Here, the value of the dividend RWM address is the value of the first byte of the dividend when it is executed for the first time, and the value of the second byte of the dividend when it is executed for the second time. It is the value of the n-th byte when it is executed the next time. However, when the ratio calculation count is 0, the dividend RWM has a storage area corresponding to the information “advantageous section game number” of the dividend (a storage area corresponding to the total accumulated advantageous section game number in FIG. 10), and the ratio calculation number is In the case of 1, the storage area corresponding to the dividend information “the number of consecutive bonus payouts in the latest 6000 games” (the storage area corresponding to the number of consecutive bonus payouts in the cumulative PS of FIG. 10), and the number of ratio calculations is 2, Information on the dividend (storage area corresponding to the number of bonus payouts in the latest 6000 games) (storage area corresponding to the number of bonus payouts of the cumulative PS in FIG. 10), if the number of times of ratio calculation is 3, information on the dividend “total game Storage area corresponding to "the number of consecutive bonuses paid out in (the storage area corresponding to the total cumulative number of consecutive bonuses paid out in FIG. 10)", when the ratio calculation number is 4, the dividend information "the number of bonuses paid out in the cumulative game" Is a storage area corresponding to "(a storage area corresponding to the total cumulative number of accessory payouts in FIG. 10).

  Subsequently, the calculating means 114b multiplies the value of the obtained 1 byte of the dividend RWM address by 100, stores the value of the upper byte in the H register and the value of the lower byte in the L register (step S733).

  Then, the calculation means 114b adds the value of the L register and the value of the D register, sets the addition result in the calculation work area, and stores the value of the H register in the D register (step S734). However, the addition result is stored in the first byte of the calculation work area when it is executed for the first time, and stored in the second byte of the calculation work area when it is executed for the second time. When executed, it is stored in the nth byte of the calculation work area.

  The calculation means 114b determines whether or not a carry-on has occurred (whether a carry has occurred or not) in the calculation result of adding the value of the L register and the value of the D register (step S735). When it is determined that the calculation result is not the carrion (NO in step S735), the process proceeds to step S737. On the other hand, when it is determined that the calculation result is carriage (YES in step S735), the calculation unit 114b adds 1 to the value of the D register to update the value of the D register (step S736). , And proceeds to step S737.

  In step S737, the calculation unit 114b performs the update process of subtracting 1 from the number of repetitions. Then, the calculation unit 114b determines whether or not the number of repetitions is 0 (step S738), and when it is determined that the number of repetitions is not 0 (NO in step S738), the process returns to step S732. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of repetitions is 0 (YES in step S738), the arithmetic unit 114b sets the value of the D register corresponding to the most significant byte of the arithmetic result to the value of the dividend RWM address of 3 bytes. In this case, it is set in the fourth byte of the calculation work area, and in the fifth byte of the calculation work area when the value of the dividend RWM address is 4 bytes (step S739). Then, the processing returns to the processing procedure of the ratio calculation processing of FIG.

3.3.5.1.2 Shift Process The shift process (steps S708 and S709) in FIG. 44 will be described with reference to FIG. However, the shift process of FIG. 46 is performed on the least significant bit of the A register corresponding to the least significant bit of the sixth byte and the fifth byte to the first byte of the operation work area.

  The arithmetic means 114b initializes the most significant byte including the A register (step S751), and rotates the 1st to 5th bytes of the arithmetic work area to the left (upper bit side) by 1 bit (step S752). As a result, the least significant bit of the A register, the 5th byte to the 2nd byte of the operation work area, and the 7th upper bits of the 1st byte of the operation work area are set to the 1st byte from the 5th byte of the operation work area before rotation. The bits up to the eye will be stored. Then, the processing returns to the processing procedure of the ratio calculation processing of FIG.

3.3.5.1.3 Subtraction Processing The subtraction processing (step S711) in FIG. 44 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The arithmetic means 114b subtracts the data of the upper 2 bytes and the lower 2 bytes of the divisor from the data from the 5th byte to the 2nd byte of the arithmetic work area in the subtraction determination portion (step S756), and then subtracts. The value corresponding to the carry flag is subtracted from the least significant bit data of the A register in the determination part (step S757). Then, the processing returns to the processing procedure of the ratio calculation processing of FIG. However, when the data from the 5th byte to the 2nd byte of the calculation work area is equal to or higher than the data of the upper 2 bytes and the lower 2 bytes of the divisor, the value corresponding to the carry flag is 0. On the other hand, when the data from the 5th byte to the 2nd byte of the operation work area is not more than the upper 2 bytes and the lower 2 bytes of the divisor, the value corresponding to the carry flag is 1.

3.3.6 Each Ratio Display Setting Each ratio display setting (step S536) in FIG. 35 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The display control means 115 determines whether or not there is an E4 error (step S771). When it is determined that the error is the E4 error (YES in step S771), the display control unit 115 determines that the ratio indicator 69 has one of the 1st digit, the 10th digit, the 100th digit, and the 1000th digit that can be turned on. $ FF (hexadecimal notation) corresponding to all lighting is set (step S772). The setting values for the ones digit, tens digit, hundreds digit, and thousands digit of the ratio indicator 69 are the ones and tens digits of the ratio indicator 69 in the 7-segment display process in step S447 of FIG. It is used to turn on or off the lightable points A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP of the hundreds, hundreds, and thousands.

  On the other hand, if the E4 error is not determined (NO in step S771), the display control unit 115 performs a ratio display data acquisition process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 49 (step S773).

  Following step S773, the display control unit 115 determines whether the ratio display number is 1 corresponding to the continuous character ratio (6000 games) or 2 corresponding to the character ratio (6000 games) (step S773). S774). If it is determined that the ratio display number is 1 or 2 (YES in step S774), the process proceeds to step S775. If it is determined that the ratio display number is neither 1 nor 2 (NO in step S774), step Proceeds to S776.

  In step S775, the display control means 115 determines whether the 6000 arrival flag is 0 (whether the number of games after installation or after RWM clear has not reached 6000) (step S775). When it is determined that the 6000 arrival flag is not 0 (NO in step S775), the process proceeds to step S779. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 6000 arrival flag is 0 (YES in step S775), the process proceeds to step S777.

  In step S776, the display control means 115 determines whether or not the total number of games is larger than 174999. When it is determined that the total number of games is larger than 174999 (YES in step S776), the process proceeds to step S779, and when it is determined that the total number of games is 174999 or less (NO in step S776). ), The process proceeds to step S777. The total number of games, 174999, is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  In step S777, the display control unit 115 determines whether the ratio blinking flag is 0. When it is determined that the ratio blinking flag is 0 (YES in step S777), the process proceeds to step S779. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ratio blinking flag is not 0 (NO in step S777), the display control means 115 allows the ratio indicator 69 to be turned on at each of the hundreds and thousands positions A, B, C, and D. , E, F, G, DP, the set values of the lightable portions except the lightable portion DP (dot portion) in the thousands are cleared to 0 (step S778), and the process proceeds to step S779.

  If the ratio display number is 1 or 2, until the total number of games after installation or after clearing the RWM reaches 6000, when the ratio blinking flag is 0, the ratio indicator 69 in step S802 of FIG. 49 to be described later. The set values for the hundreds digit and the thousands digit (excluding the lightable portion DP of the thousands digit) are displayed in the 7-segment display process in step S447 of FIG. It is used to light or extinguish the lightable portions except for the thousands of lightable portions DP among the lightable portions A, B, C, D, E, F, G and DP. Further, when the ratio blinking flag is 1, the set values for the hundreds digit and the thousands digit of the ratio indicator 69 in step S778 (excluding the lightable portion DP of the thousands digit) are 7 in step S447 of FIG. In the segment display process, the ratio indicator 69 is lit up except for the lit place DP of the tens place among the lit place A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP. It is used to turn on or off possible points, and the thousandth possible lighting point DP among the hundreds and thousandth possible lighting points A, B, C, D, E, F, G, DP Except for all lights that can be turned on, all lights go off.

  Further, when the ratio display number is 0, 3 or 4, until the total number of games after installation or after RWM clear reaches 175000, when the ratio blinking flag is 0, the ratio display in step S802 of FIG. 49 described later. The set values for the hundreds digit and the thousands digit of the device 69 (excluding the lightable portion DP of the thousands digit) are set in the 7-segment display process in step S447 of FIG. It is used to light or extinguish the lightable portions except for the thousands lightable portion DP among the lightable portions A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP of each unit. Further, when the ratio blinking flag is 1, the set values for the hundreds digit and the thousands digit of the ratio indicator 69 in step S778 (excluding the lightable portion DP of the thousands digit) are 7 in step S447 of FIG. In the segment display process, the ratio indicator 69 is lit up except for the lit place DP of the tens place among the lit place A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP. It is used to turn on or off possible points, and the thousandth possible lighting point DP among the hundreds and thousandth possible lighting points A, B, C, D, E, F, G, DP Except for all lights that can be turned on, all lights are turned off.

  In step S779, the display control unit 115 acquires the data corresponding to the ratio display number from the ratio comparison data table. Here, in the ratio comparison data table, the ratio display number, the type of ratio, and the ratio specified value (a value that is determined to be fraudulent, and if it is equal to or greater than the ratio specified value, fraud is determined to be fraudulent. Judgment) and. The ratio type “advantageous section ratio (cumulative)” and the ratio regulation value “70” are stored in association with the ratio display number 0, and the ratio type “continuous role ratio (6000 games) is associated with the ratio display number 1. ) ”And the ratio definition value“ 70 ”are stored, and the ratio type“ role ratio (6000 game) ”and the ratio definition value“ 70 ”are stored in association with the ratio display number 2. Further, the ratio type “continuous accessory ratio (cumulative)” and the ratio regulation value “70” are stored in association with the ratio display number 3, and the ratio type “accompaniment ratio ( “Total”) and the specified ratio value “70” are stored. The ratio prescribed value 70 is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the ratio does not have to be the same value.

  Following step S779, the display control unit 115 compares the data (ratio specified value) corresponding to the ratio display number acquired in step S779 with the value of the ratio RWM corresponding to the ratio display number (step S780). Here, when the ratio display number is 0, the value of the ratio RWM corresponding to the ratio display number is the value of the advantageous zone ratio (cumulative) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the advantageous zone ratio of the total sum in FIG. 10). Yes, when the ratio display number is 1, it is the value of the continuous character ratio (6000 games) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the continuous character ratio of the cumulative PS in FIG. 10), and when the ratio display number is 2, It is the value of the character ratio (6000 games) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the character ratio of the cumulative PS in FIG. 10), and when the ratio display number is 3, the value of the continuous character ratio (cumulative) (FIG. 10). When the ratio display number is 4, the value of the character ratio (cumulative) (the storage area corresponding to the total character ratio of the total character of FIG. 10). Value).

  Subsequent to step S780, the display control unit 115 determines whether or not the determination result is carry-on (step S781). When it is determined that the determination result is carriage (that is, the value of the ratio RWM is less than the acquired data (ratio specified value)) (YES in step S781), the process proceeds to step S784.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result is not the carry-on (that is, the value of the ratio RWM is equal to or greater than the acquired data (ratio specified value)) (NO in step S781), the display control unit 115 causes the ratio blinking flag to be 0. Is determined (step S782). Then, when it is determined that the ratio blinking flag is 0 (YES in step S782), the process proceeds to step S784. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ratio blinking flag is not 0 (NO in step S782), the display control means 115 allows the tens place and the ones place of the ratio indicator 69 to be lightable A, B, C, and D, respectively. , E, F, G, DP of the tens digit and the ones digit, the set values of the lightable portions except the lightable portion DP (dot portion) are cleared to 0 (step S783), and step S784. Proceed to processing.

  When the value of the ratio RWM is greater than or equal to the specified value of the ratio, and the ratio blinking flag is 0, the set value (one of the one) and the tens of the ratio indicator 69 in step S811 of FIG. (Except for the lightable portions DP of the tens place and the tens place), in the 7-segment display process in step S447 of FIG. 32, the lightable places A, B, and C of the ratio indicator 69 are displayed. , D, E, F, G, DP are used to turn on or off the lightable portions except the lightable portions DP at the ones and tens places, respectively. Further, when the ratio blinking flag is 1, the set values (excluding the lightable portions DP of each of the ones and the tens) of the ratio indicator 69 in step S783 are excluded from the values shown in FIG. In the 7-segment display process in step S447, the ratio indicator 69 can be turned on in the first place and the tens place, respectively, of the lightable points A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP. It is used to light or extinguish the lightable parts except the lightable parts DP of the respective positions, and the lightable parts A, B, C, D, E, F, G, DP of the respective ones and tens positions are lighted. All the lightable portions except the lightable portions DP of the first place and the tens place are turned off.

  The display control unit 115 determines whether the dot blinking flag is 0 (step S784). Then, when it is determined that the dot blinking flag is 0 (YES in step S784), the process returns to the processing procedure of the outside-use-area interrupt process of FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the dot blinking flag is not 0 (NO in step S784), the display control unit 115 sets the lightable portion DP of each of the first digit, the tens digit, and the thousands digit of the ratio indicator 69. The value is cleared and the value is set to 0 (step S785), and the process returns to the processing procedure of the used area external interruption processing of FIG.

  When the dot blinking flag is 0, the set value for the lit place DP of the thousands indicator of the ratio indicator 69 in step S802 of FIG. 49, which will be described later, the ones digit of the percent indicator 69 in step S811, Setting values for the respective possible lighting positions DP of the respective units, the setting values for the ones possible lighting positions DP of the ratio display 69 in step S813, and the tenth possible lighting positions DP of the ratio display 69 in step S815. 32 and the set value for the lit place DP of the ratio indicator 69 in step S817 are the ones and tens of the ratio indicator 69 in the 7-segment display process in step S447 of FIG. , Thousands place is used to turn on or off the lightable portion DP. However, a value corresponding to extinguishment is first set in step S802 for the lit place DP of the thousands display of the ratio indicator 69, and if YES in step S816, a value corresponding to lighting is set in step S817. It Further, for the tens place possible lighting portion DP of the ratio indicator 69, a value corresponding to turning off is first set in step S811, and if YES in step S814, a value corresponding to lighting is set in step S815. It Further, a value corresponding to extinguishment is first set in step S811 for the one-digit lightable portion DP of the ratio indicator 69, and if YES in step S812, a value corresponding to lighting is set in step S813. It On the other hand, when the dot blinking flag is 1, the set value for each one-, ten-, and one-thousands lightable portion DP of the ratio indicator 69 in step S785 is displayed in 7-segment display in step S447 of FIG. In the process, the ratio indicator 69 is used to turn on or off each one-, ten-, and one-thousands lit place DP, and each one-place, tens-place, and thousands place can be lit. All of the points DP are turned off.

  The acquisition of the ratio display data of FIG. 48 (step S773) will be described with reference to FIG.

  The display control unit 115 acquires the display data and the display determination data corresponding to the ratio display number from the ratio display data table (step S801). The ratio display data table stores ratio display numbers, ratio types, display data, and display determination data in association with each other. Corresponding to the ratio display number “0”, the type of ratio “advantageous section ratio (cumulative)”, display data “$ 27F7” (hexadecimal notation) (in binary notation 00101111 11110111, thousands place can be turned on A , B, C, F are lit, and the hundredth place is lit-enabled locations A, B, C, E, F, G, DP), and display determination data “1” is stored. Corresponding to the ratio display number "1", the ratio type "continuous role ratio (6000 games)", display data "$ 7DFC" (hexadecimal notation) (01111101 11111100 in binary notation, thousands place can be turned on The points A, C, D, E, F, G are lit, and the hundredth place is lit, the points C, D, E, F, G, DP are lit), and the display determination data “1” is stored. Corresponding to the ratio display number “2”, the type of ratio “role ratio (6000 games)”, display data “$ 27FC” (hexadecimal notation) (in binary notation 00101111 11111100, thousands place can be turned on) A, B, C, and F are lit, and the hundreds of lit places C, D, E, F, G, and DP are lit), and display determination data “1” is stored. Corresponding to the ratio display number "3", the kind of ratio "continuous accessory ratio (cumulative)", display data "$ 7DD8" (hexadecimal notation) (01111101 11011000 in binary notation, place of thousands can be turned on) A, C, D, E, F, and G are lit, and the hundredth digit is a lit possible place D, E, G, and DP), and display determination data “1” is stored. Corresponding to the ratio display number "4", the ratio type "continuous accessory ratio (cumulative)", display data "$ 27D8" (hexadecimal notation) (binary notation 00101111 11011000, place of thousands can be turned on) A, B, C, and F are lit, and the hundredth place is a lit possible place D, E, G, and DP), and display determination data “1” is stored. However, of the four-digit value in hexadecimal notation of the display data, the value of the upper two digits corresponds to the thousands digit of the ratio display 69, and the value of the lower two digits corresponds to the hundreds digit of the ratio display 69. To do. Further, the display determination data is set by the function of the slot machine, and the display determination data “1” uses the calculated value in the ratio calculation process for displaying the tens and the ones of the ratio indicator 69. For example, in a slot machine that does not have a function related to the advantageous section, the display determination data stored in association with the ratio display number “0” is “0”.

  The display control means 115 sets the display data acquired in step S801 to the hundreds digit and the thousands digit of the ratio indicator 69 (step S802). For example, when the ratio display number is 0, $ F7 (hexadecimal notation) is set in the hundreds place of the ratio indicator 69, and $ 27 (hexadecimal notation) is set in the thousands place. In step S802, 0 corresponding to extinguishment is set as the setting value of the lit place DP (dot portion) of the ratio indicator 69.

  Then, the display control unit 115 sets $ 4040 (hexadecimal notation) in the display data (step S803). This process is a process for setting the ratio display at the ones and tens of the ratio indicator 69 in the ratio display number for which the display determination data is 0 to "---" (only the lightable portion G is lit). is there. By performing the process of step S803 before step S804, which will be described later, the process of step S803 is performed even in the slot machine in which the display determination data for all ratio display numbers is 1. Further, in step S803, in the first embodiment, the program for displaying "---" used in the case of a model that does not have the function related to the advantageous section has the function related to the advantageous section. This is a step for avoiding a so-called "unused program" that will not be executed.

  Then, the display control unit 115 determines whether the display determination data acquired in step S801 is 0 (step S804). When it is determined that the display determination data is 0 (YES in step S804), the display control unit 115 sets the display data to the ones digit and the tens digit of the ratio indicator 69, and here, the ratio indicator 69. $ 40 (hexadecimal notation) is set in the ones place and the tens place, respectively (step S811). Then, the process proceeds to step S812. In step S811, 0 corresponding to extinguishment is set as the set value of the lightable portion DP (dot portion) of each of the first digit and the tens digit of the ratio indicator 69.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the display determination data is not 0 (NO in step S804), the display control unit 115 acquires the value of the ratio RWM address corresponding to the ratio display number (step S805). Here, if the ratio display number is 0, the value of the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the advantageous section ratio of the total accumulation in FIG. 10) is acquired, and if the ratio display number is 1, continuous When the value of the character ratio (6000 games) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the continuous character ratio of the cumulative PS in FIG. 10) is acquired and the ratio display number is 2, the value of the character ratio (6000 games) ( If the value of the storage area corresponding to the cumulative PS character ratio of FIG. 10 is acquired and the ratio display number is 3, the value of the continuous character ratio (cumulative) (the total cumulative value of the continuous character ratio of FIG. 10) is obtained. When the ratio display number is 4, the value of the accessory ratio (cumulative) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the total cumulative accessory ratio in FIG. 10) is acquired.

  Following step S805, the display control unit 115 sets $ 6F6F (hexadecimal notation) in the display data (step S806). In this processing, when the value of the ratio RWM is 100, the ratio display at the first digit and the tens digit of the ratio indicator 69 is set to "99" (lightable points other than the lightable points E and DP are turned on). This is processing for.

  The display control means 115 determines whether or not the value of the ratio RWM address is 100 (step S807). When it is determined that the value of the ratio RWM is 100 (YES in step S807), the display control unit 115 sets the display data to the ones digit and the tens digit of the ratio indicator 69, and here, the ratio indicator. $ 6F (hexadecimal notation) is set in the ones digit and the tens digit of 69, respectively (step S811). Then, the process proceeds to step S812. In step S811, 0 corresponding to extinguishment is set as the set value of the lightable portion DP (dot portion) of each of the first digit and the tens digit of the ratio indicator 69.

  When it is determined that the RWM value of the ratio indicator 69 is not 100 (NO in step S807), the display control unit 115 divides the value of the ratio RWM address by 10 (decimal notation) to calculate the quotient and the remainder. (Step S808). The value of the quotient in decimal notation is the value of the tens place in the decimal notation of the value of the ratio RWM address, and the value in the remainder of the decimal notation is the one in the decimal notation of the value of the ratio RWM address. The value of the place.

  Then, the display control means 115 performs a display data acquisition process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 50 for acquiring the display data of tens (step S809), and subsequently acquires the display data of ones place. Display data acquisition processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 50, is performed (step S810). Then, the display control unit 115 sets the display data of the ones digit obtained in step S810 and the display data of the tens digit obtained in step S809 to the ones digit and the tens digit of ratio indicator 69 ( The process proceeds to step S811) and step S812. In step S811, 0 corresponding to extinguishment is set as the set value of the lightable portion DP (dot portion) of each of the first digit and the tens digit of the ratio indicator 69.

  The display control means 115 determines whether or not at least one ratio of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 is equal to or higher than the specified ratio value (step S812). The ratio indicated by the ratio display number 3 is the continuous character ratio (cumulative), which is the value stored in the storage area corresponding to the total character ratio of the continuous character in FIG. Further, the ratio of the ratio display number 4 is the character ratio (cumulative), which is a value stored in the storage area corresponding to the total character ratio in FIG. Further, the prescribed ratio values for the continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) and the accessory ratio (cumulative) are stored in the ratio comparison data table described above.

  When it is determined that all the ratios of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 are less than the specified ratio value (NO in step S812), the process proceeds to step S814. The set value of the one-digit lightable portion DP of the ratio indicator 69 remains the value set in step S811, that is, 0 corresponding to turning off. On the other hand, when it is determined that at least one ratio of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 is equal to or greater than the ratio specified value (YES in step S812), the display control unit 115 causes the ratio indicator 69 to be able to turn on the first place. The DP is set to 1 corresponding to lighting (step S813), and the process proceeds to step S814.

  The display control means 115 determines whether or not at least one ratio of the ratio display numbers 0 to 4 is equal to or higher than the ratio specified value (step S814). The ratio indicated by the ratio display number 0 is the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), which is the value stored in the storage area corresponding to the total cumulative advantageous section ratio. Further, the ratio of the ratio display number 1 is the continuous character ratio (6000 games), which is a value stored in the storage area corresponding to the continuous character ratio of the cumulative PS in FIG. Further, the ratio of the ratio display number 2 is the character ratio (6000 games), which is a value stored in the storage area corresponding to the character ratio of the cumulative PS in FIG. The ratio indicated by the ratio display number 3 is the continuous accessory ratio (cumulative), which is a value stored in the storage area corresponding to the total cumulative continuous accessory ratio in FIG. Further, the ratio of the ratio display number 4 is the character ratio (cumulative), which is a value stored in the storage area corresponding to the total character ratio in FIG. In addition, the ratio regulation value for each of the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the continuous character ratio (6000 games), the character ratio (6000 games), the continuous character ratio (cumulative), and the character ratio (cumulative) is the ratio comparison described above. It is stored in the data table.

  When it is determined that any of the ratio display numbers 0 to 4 is less than the specified ratio value (NO in step S814), the process proceeds to step S816. The set value of the tens digit of the possible lighting portion DP of the ratio indicator 69 remains the value set in step S811, that is, 0 corresponding to the extinction. On the other hand, when it is determined that at least one of the ratio display numbers 0 to 4 is equal to or higher than the ratio specified value (YES in step S814), the display control unit 115 causes the ratio indicator 69 to turn on the tens digit. The DP is set to 1 corresponding to lighting (step S815), and the process proceeds to step S816.

  The display control means 115 determines whether or not the total number of games (the value stored in the storage area corresponding to the total number of total games in FIG. 10) is less than 175000 (step S816). If it is determined that the total number of games is 175,000 or more (NO in step S816), the process returns to the processing procedure for setting each ratio display in FIG. The setting value of the lit place DP of the ratio indicator 69 remains the value set in step S802, that is, 0 corresponding to turning off. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total number of games is less than 175000 (YES in step S816), the display control unit 115 sets 1 corresponding to lighting to the lit place DP of the thousands display of the ratio indicator 69. The setting is performed (step S817), and the process returns to the processing procedure of each ratio display setting in FIG.

  The display data acquisition process (steps S809 and S810) of FIG. 49 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The display control unit 115 acquires the bit value of the lower 4 bits of the calculation data in step S808 of FIG. 49 (step S831). Here, in the display data acquisition process related to the acquisition of the tens display data, the lower 4 bits of the quotient value are acquired, and in the display data acquisition process related to the acquisition of the ones display data, , The lower 4 bits of the remainder value are acquired. Since the value of the ratio RWM address is 0 or more and less than 100, the value of the quotient and the value of the remainder are 0 or more and 9 or less in decimal notation, and can be represented by 4 bits in binary notation. Therefore, the bit value of the lower 4 bits of the calculated data is acquired.

  Subsequently, the display control unit 115 sets the 8-bit bit value corresponding to the lower 4-bit value acquired in step S831 in the display data (step S832), and executes the ratio display data acquisition processing procedure of FIG. Return.

  However, if the lower 4 bits are 0000 (binary notation), the display data is $ 3F in hexadecimal notation (in binary notation, 00111111, lightable points A, B, C, D, E, F are lit). Is set and the lower 4 bits are 0001 (binary notation), the display data is set to hexadecimal notation $ 06 (in binary notation 00000110, lightable points B and C are lit), and the lower 4 When the bit is 0010 (binary notation), $ 5B in hexadecimal notation (01011011, lightable points A, B, D, E, G in binary notation) is set in the display data, and the lower 4 When the bit is 0011 (binary notation), $ 4F in hexadecimal notation (01001111, lightable points A, B, C, D, and G in binary notation) is set in the display data, and the lower 4 When the bit is 0100 (binary notation), the display data is set to hexadecimal notation $ 66 (in binary notation 01100110, lightable points B, C, F, and G are lit), and the lower 4 bits are set. In the case of 0101 (binary notation), $ 6D in hexadecimal notation (01101101, lightable points A, C, D, F, G in binary notation) is set in the display data, and the lower 4 bits are set. In the case of 0110 (binary notation), $ 7D in hexadecimal notation (01111101, lightable points A, C, D, E, F, and G in binary notation) are set in the display data, and the lower 4 When the bit is 0111 (binary notation), $ 27 (hexadecimal notation, 00101111, lightable points A, B, C, and F are lit) is set in the display data, and the lower 4 bits are set. In the case of 1000 (binary notation), $ 7F in hexadecimal notation (01111111, lightable points A, B, C, D, E, F, G in binary notation) are set in the display data, When the lower 4 bits are 1001 (binary notation), $ 6F in hexadecimal notation (01101111, lightable locations A, B, C, D, F, G in binary notation) is set in the display data. To be done.

4. Sub-Error Notification Process The error notification process in the sub-CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIG.

  It is determined whether the sub control command receiving means 201 of the sub CPU 71 has received the transmission command in step S439 of FIG. 32 from the sub control command transmitting means 111 of the main CPU 61 (step S851). If it is determined that the transmission command has not been received (NO in step S851), the process ends.

  When it is determined that the transmission command has been received (YES in step S851), it is determined whether the transmission command is in the door state (step S852). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the transmission command is a door state related to opening / closing of the door (front door 5).

  When it is determined that the transmission command is for the door state (YES in step S852), it is determined whether the door state is the open state of the front door 5 (step S853). When it is determined that the front door 5 is in the open state (YES in step S853), error notification is performed (step S854). Specifically, sound is output from the speaker, an image is output from the liquid crystal display 27, and the effect lamp is turned on and blinks. Then, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the front door 5 is not in the open state, that is, in the closed state (NO in step S853), the error notification is cleared (initialized) (step S855). Specifically, the audio output from the speaker is stopped, the image output of the liquid crystal display 27 is stopped, and the lighting and blinking of the effect lamp are stopped. Then, the process ends.

  When it is determined in the determination in step S852 that the transmission command is not for the door state (NO in step S852), error notification is performed (step S856). Specifically, a voice notification of "error" is given from the speaker, and an error code such as "E2" is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27.

  Following step S856, it is determined whether or not the information indicating the error state in step S132 of FIG. 22 is received (step S857). When it is determined that the information indicating the error state is not received (NO in step S857), the standby state is set. On the other hand, if it is determined that the information indicating the error state is received (YES in step S857), error re-notification is performed (step S858).

  Following step S858, it is determined whether an error cancellation event (signal) has been received (step S859). When it is determined that the error cancellation event (signal) is received (YES in step S859), the error notification is cleared (initialized) (step S860). That is, the state returns to the state where the error notification is not performed. Then, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the error cancellation event (signal) is not received (NO in step S859), the process ends.

  Subsequently, the relationship between the display of the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69, the display of the payout display 46, and the state of the main CPU 61 will be described with reference to FIG.

  It is assumed that the main CPU 61 is in the game advancing state and the error shown in FIG. 16 has not occurred. At this time, the payout display control unit 118 of the main CPU 61 controls the payout indicator 46 according to the progress of the game, and displays the number of medals paid out according to the progress of the game.

  Further, the display control means 115 of the main CPU 61 normally controls the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 in the normal display mode described with reference to FIGS. 12, 13 and 14 when displaying the game inspection information. Perform display control. As a result, the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 displays the display item (1) advantageous zone ratio (total) for 5 seconds, as described in the control content of the role ratio monitor in FIG. , Display item (2) Continuous character ratio (6000 games) is displayed for 5 seconds, Display item (3) Character ratio (6000 games) is displayed for 5 seconds, Display item (4) Continuous character ratio (cumulative) Is displayed. At this time, the normal display mode concretely displayed on the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 is shown in the 7-segment display of the role ratio monitor. However, in the normal display mode, some of the plurality of lightable portions of the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 can be lighted (thousands, tens, and ones are turned on in the present embodiment). Display of game inspection information (including a ratio value such as an advantageous section ratio (cumulative) and identification information for identifying the displayed ratio) using other possible lightable points except the possible point DP) The display related to the notification of the abnormal state of the five types of game inspection information is performed using the above-mentioned part of the lights that can be turned on. In the example of FIG. 60, before the power is turned off, all of the five types of ratios are less than the prescribed ratio value, and the total number of games is 175,000 or more. The lightable portions DP (dot portions) of each of the 1s and 1s positions are turned off.

  When the power is turned off while the display item (4) continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) is displayed, the main CPU 61 is in a power-off state, and the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 and the payout indicator 46 are turned off. To do.

  After that, when the power is turned on and the specific event detection means 112 of the main CPU 61 detects an RWM error (corresponding to a predetermined specific event of the specific events), the main CPU 61 enters an E4 error state and the game stopping means 113 causes the game to stop. The game is stopped so that the game cannot proceed. At this time, the payout display control means 118 of the main CPU 61 controls the payout display 46 to display the error code E4. At this time, the contents specifically displayed on the payout display unit 46 are shown in the 7-segment display.

  Further, the display control means 115 of the main CPU 61 carries out special display control for controlling the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 in the special display mode described with reference to FIG. 15 when an RWM error is detected. At this time, a special display mode concretely displayed on the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 is shown in the 7-segment display of the role ratio monitor. However, the special display mode uses all the lightable parts of the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 in the present embodiment. In this way, by performing the special display control in which the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 is in the special display mode when the RWM error occurs, the front surface is opened when the front door 5 is opened and the inside of the housing 3 is checked. It is possible to know that an RWM error has occurred without checking the error code displayed on the payout display device 46 on the front side of the door 5. That is, it is possible to know the occurrence of the RWM error while opening the front door 5 and checking the inside of the housing, and it is possible to reduce the troublesomeness of having to look at the payout indicator 46.

  Then, when the power is turned off, the main CPU 61 is turned off, and the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 and the payout indicator 46 are turned off.

  A setting change state transition operation is performed to release the RWM error, the main CPU 61 transitions to the setting change state, the RWM error is released at this timing, and the stop of the game by the game stop means 113 is released. Then, the payout display control means 118 of the main CPU 61 controls the payout display device 46 according to the progress of the game, and displays according to the progress of the game such as the display of the number of medals paid out. It should be noted that the display of the payout display device 46 in the setting change state can be variously set, and all 7 segments of the payout display device 46 may be turned on so that the setting change state can be known.

  Further, the display control means 115 of the main CPU 61 does not perform the above special display control when shifting to the setting change state, and in the normal display mode described with reference to FIGS. 12, 13 and 14, the ratio display device. The normal display control for controlling the (role ratio monitor) 69 is performed. As a result, the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 starts from the display of the display item (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative), as described in the control content of the role ratio monitor in FIG. (1) Advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is displayed for 5 seconds, followed by display item (2) Continuous character ratio (6000 games) for 5 seconds, and display item (3) Character ratio (6000 games). It is displayed for 5 seconds, and the display item (4) continuous accessory ratio (total) is displayed for 5 seconds. At this time, the normal display mode concretely displayed on the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 is shown in the 7-segment display of the role ratio monitor. However, since the RWM has been cleared, the upper two digits (thousands, hundreds) of the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 are displayed in blinking, and the lower two digits (ratio of the ratio display) 69 (role ratio monitor) 69. 00 is displayed in the tens place and the ones place. Further, since the total number of games has become 0 by clearing the RWM, the lit place DP (dot portion) of the tens place of the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 blinks.

  Then, when the setting is confirmed in the setting changeable state, the main CPU 61 enters the game progressable state.

  The transition of the setting change state and the setting confirmation will be described. The administrator opens the front door 5, inserts the setting change key into the key cylinder while the power switch 50a is OFF, rotates the key, and turns ON the setting change key switch 50b. In this state, the power switch 50a is turned on. At this time, the main CPU 61 detects the operation of turning on the setting change key switch 50b and shifts to the setting change state. In this setting change state, the setting control means 101 sets a plurality of levels of setting values (1 to 6 in the present embodiment) that are provided stepwise according to the degree of advantage of the player based on the operation of the setting change button 50c. ), It is possible to change the setting value.

  Then, the setting control unit 101 cyclically switches the setting value of the winning probability from setting 1 to setting 6 each time the administrator operates the setting change button 50c. The administrator operates the start switch 19 when the setting value of the winning probability reaches a desired value by operating the setting change button 50c, and when the setting control unit 101 detects the operation on the start switch 19, the setting value To confirm. Then, the administrator turns the setting change key switch 50b by turning the setting change key inserted in the key cylinder, and when the setting control means 101 detects that the setting change key switch 50b is turned off, the setting change processing is performed. finish.

  In the present embodiment, the timing of returning to the normal display control of the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 after the detection of the RWM error is the timing of shifting to the setting change state after the occurrence of the RWM error. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be the timing of re-inputting the setting after shifting to the setting change state, the detection timing of the setting confirmation operation after shifting to the setting change state, the release timing of the RWM error, the timing of ending the setting change state, or the like.

  Next, another relationship between the display of the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69, the display of the payout display 46, and the state of the main CPU 61 will be described with reference to FIG. 61. Since the process is the same as that in FIG. 60 until the power is first turned off and then the power is turned on, the description is omitted here.

  When the power is turned on and the specific event detection means 112 of the main CPU 61 detects an error other than the RWM error shown in FIG. 16 (a specific event different from a predetermined specific event among the specific events; here, an E0 error), the main event is detected. The CPU 61 becomes the E0 error state, and the game stopping means 113 stops the game so that the game cannot proceed. At this time, the payout display control means 118 of the main CPU 61 controls the payout display 46 to display the error code E0. At this time, the contents specifically displayed on the payout display unit 46 are shown in the 7-segment display.

  Further, in the case of an error other than the RWM error (here, E0 error), the data for displaying the advantageous section ratio (total) is not broken, and therefore the display control means 115 of the main CPU 61 is shown in FIG. The normal display control for controlling the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 is performed in the normal display mode described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. As a result, the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 starts from the display item (1) display of the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), and the display item, as described in the control contents of the role ratio monitor in FIG. (1) Advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is displayed for 5 seconds, followed by display item (2) Continuous character ratio (6000 games) for 5 seconds, and display item (3) Character ratio (6000 games). Displayed for 5 seconds, display item (4) continuous character ratio (total) is displayed for 5 seconds, display item (5) character ratio (total) is displayed for 5 seconds, display item (1) advantageous section ratio (total) ) Is displayed for 5 seconds. At this time, the normal display mode concretely displayed on the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 is shown in the 7-segment display of the role ratio monitor. In the example of FIG. 61, it is assumed that all of the five types of ratios are less than the ratio prescribed value, the total number of games is 175,000 or more, and the thousands indicator, the tens digit, and the ones digit of the ratio indicator 69 are lit. The possible location DP (dot portion) is off.

  After that, when the error is released, the main CPU 61 enters the game progressable state. At this time, the payout display control means 118 of the main CPU 61 controls the payout indicator 46 according to the progress of the game, the error code E0 disappears, and the display according to the progress of the game such as the number of medals paid out is displayed. Done. An error other than the RWM error (E0 error here) does not need to be changed, and it can be canceled by operating the reset switch, which is the setting change button in this embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, still another relationship between the display of the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69, the display of the payout display 46, and the state of the main CPU 61 will be described.

  It is assumed that the main CPU 61 is in the game advancing state and the error shown in FIG. 16 has not occurred. At this time, the payout display control unit 118 of the main CPU 61 controls the payout indicator 46 according to the progress of the game, and displays the number of medals paid out according to the progress of the game.

  Further, the display control means 115 of the main CPU 61 normally controls the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 in the normal display mode described with reference to FIGS. 12, 13 and 14 when displaying the game inspection information. Perform display control. As a result, the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 displays the display item (2) continuous role ratio (6000 games) for 5 seconds, as described in the control content of the role ratio monitor in FIG. Display item (3) Character ratio (6000 games) is displayed for 5 seconds, Display item (4) Continuous character ratio (total) is displayed for 5 seconds, Display item (5) Character ratio (total) is 5 seconds. The display item (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is displayed. At this time, the normal display mode concretely displayed on the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 is shown in the 7-segment display of the role ratio monitor. In the example of FIG. 62, the character ratio (cumulative) of the ratio display number 4 is equal to or higher than the ratio specified value, and the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) of the ratio display numbers 0 to 3, the continuous character ratio (6000 games), the character The ratio (6000 games) and the continuous role ratio (cumulative) are each less than the specified ratio value, and the total number of games is 175,000 or more, and the tenth digit and the first digit of the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69. Each of the lightable portions DP (dot portions) blinks, and the thousands of lightable portions DP (dot portions) are turned off.

  Then, while the display item (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is being displayed, the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on. After the power is turned on, the same processing as that before the power is turned off is performed in the slot machine 1. Here, the display control means 115 of the main CPU 61 controls the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 in the normal display mode described with reference to FIGS. 12, 13 and 14 when displaying the game inspection information. Normal display control is performed. As a result, the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 displays the display item (1) advantageous section ratio (total) for 5 seconds, as described in the control content of the role ratio monitor in FIG. , Display item (2) Continuous character ratio (6000 games) is displayed for 5 seconds, Display item (3) Character ratio (6000 games) is displayed for 5 seconds, Display item (4) Continuous character ratio (cumulative) Is displayed for 5 seconds, display item (5) accessory ratio (total) is displayed for 5 seconds, and display item (1) advantageous section ratio (total) is displayed for 5 seconds. At this time, the normal display mode concretely displayed on the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 is shown in the 7-segment display of the role ratio monitor. In the example of FIG. 62, the character ratio (cumulative) of the ratio display number 4 is equal to or higher than the ratio specified value, and the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) of the ratio display numbers 0 to 3, continuous character ratio (6000 games), character The ratio (6000 games) and the continuous role ratio (cumulative) are each less than the specified ratio value, and the total number of games is 175,000 or more, and the tenth digit and the first digit of the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69. The respective lightable portions DP (dot portions) are blinking, and the thirty-third lightable portions DP (dot portions) of the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 are off.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a modification of the display contents of the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 when an RWM error occurs will be described. The display mode according to the display method of FIG. 63 corresponds to the special display mode, and the display control corresponds to the special display control.

  Modifications 1 to 3 relate to the display of the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 when an RWM error occurs, and the display content of the 7-segment display column in FIG. 63 indicates the ratio when the RWM error occurs. It is a specific display example of the display 69.

  In the first modification, in the thousandth digit, the hundredth digit, the tens digit, and the ones digit of the ratio indicator 69, among the lightable points A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP. Only the points G and DP that can be turned on are turned on (“−” display + dot lighting).

  In the second modification, in the thousandth place, the hundredth place, the tens place, and the ones place of the ratio indicator 69, among the lightable points A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP. Only the points A, D, E, F, G, and DP that can be turned on are turned on (“E” display + dot lighting).

  In the third modification, in the thousandth place, the hundredth place, the tens place, and the ones place of the ratio indicator 69, among the lightable points A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP. Only the lightable point DP lights up (no display + dot lighting).

  When the display contents of the 7-segment display column in FIG. 63 and the display contents of the 7-segment display column in FIGS. 12, 13, and 14 are compared, when a RWM error occurs in Modification 1 to Modification 3 in FIG. 63. In the special display control of, the game inspection information (including the ratio value such as the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) and the identification information for identifying the displayed ratio) is not displayed, and the predetermined location is It is supposed to light up. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that the RWM error has occurred in the modified examples 1 to 3 by the display of the ratio display 69 in which the game inspection information is not displayed and the predetermined portion is turned on. Become.

  The normal lighting mode and the special lighting mode are described above as long as the normal lighting mode displayed in the normal display control and the special lighting mode displayed in the special display control can be distinguished from each other. It is not limited to what was done.

  Next, the arrangement relationship of components (connector, ratio indicator, main CPU, IC, etc.) mounted on the main control board 63 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 64.

  On one surface 63A of the main control board 63, three connectors CN1, CN2, CN3 are mounted in an area near one edge thereof, and an edge on the connector CN3 side in an area near an edge facing the one edge. One connector CN4 is mounted nearby. Of the connectors CN1, CN2, CN3, CN4, at least the connector CN1 is formed in the substrate case CS as shown in FIG. 64 (a) showing a schematic cross-sectional view of the main control substrate 63 of FIG. It is exposed to the outside through the opened connector opening CS1.

  Further, on the one surface 63A of the main control board 63, the main CPU 61 is mounted near the edge on the connector CN1 side in the area near the facing edge. A test mounting area for mounting a test IC or the like is provided between the main CPU 61 and the connector CN4.

  Further, on the one surface 63A of the main control board 63, a ratio indicator 69 and ICs 81 and 82 are mounted between the main CPU 61 and the connector CN1. The ratio indicator 69 is arranged closer to the connector CN1 than the main CPU 61. Further, the ICs 81 and 82 are arranged between the ratio indicator 69 and the main CPU 61, and as shown in FIG. )) 69, the height from the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 is lower (see the dotted line in FIG. 64 (a)). However, no component such as an IC having a height lower than that of the ratio indicator 69 is arranged between the ratio indicator 69 and the connector CN1. The ratio indicator 69 is preferably arranged between the connector closest to the main CPU 61 and the main CPU 61. In addition, the ratio indicator 69 is arranged between the main CPU 61 and the connector corresponding to the connector opening having the longest opening side, because an illegal member such as a wire is more likely to be inserted as the opening side is longer. Is preferred.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), the ratio indicator 69 is provided on the other side of the main control board 63 (the part mounting surface) 63A, which is opposite to the other surface (the main control board 63 on which no parts are mounted). The back side) 63B is soldered only on the 63B side, and the connector CN1 other than the ratio indicator 69, the main CPU (simply referred to as “CPU” in FIG. 64) 61, the ICs 81, 82, etc. are on the one side 63A of the main control board 63. CN1A, 61A, 81A, 82A are soldered on both the side and the other surface 63B side. The components other than the ratio indicator 69 are not soldered on both the one surface 63A and the other surface 63B, but only one surface is soldered, for example, the connector CN1 is only on the other surface 63B side. Good.

  Further, the ICs 83, 84, 85, the diode 91, the resistor groups 92, 94, the transistor 93, and the capacitor group 95 are mounted on the one surface 63A of the main control board 63.

  The ICs 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, the diode 91, the resistance groups 92, 94, the transistor 93, and the capacitor group 95 are, for example, input of signals to the main CPU 61 and output of signals from the main CPU 61 to external devices. It is a part related to.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the connector CN1, the ratio indicator 69, the ICs 81 and 82, and the main CPU 61 are sequentially arranged from the connector CN1 side to the main CPU 61 side, and the ratio indicator 69 is arranged at a position closer to the connector CN1 than the main CPU61. The effect of this will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 (b), (c), and (d).

  FIG. 64B is an example different from the embodiment, in which the connector CN1, the IC 81, and the main CPU 61 are arranged in this order. In this case, in order for the illegal member 180 such as a wire inserted from the connector opening CS1 to reach the main CPU 61, it is necessary to get over the IC 81. Since it is easy to get over the illegal member 180, it is not difficult to make the illegal member 180 reach the main CPU 61 even if there is an IC 81 having a low height between the connector CN1 and the main CPU 61.

  FIG. 64C is an example different from the embodiment, in which the connector CN1, the IC 81, the ratio indicator 69, and the main CPU 61 are arranged in this order from the connector CN1 side to the main CPU 61 side. In this case, in order to reach the main CPU 61 by the illegal member 180 inserted from the connector opening CS1, it is necessary to get over the IC 81 and the ratio indicator 69, but the height component is higher than the height component. Although it is difficult to get over the illegal member 180, the illegal member 180 uses the low-height IC 81 arranged between the connector CN1 and the ratio indicator 69, so that the illegal member 180 has a high ratio indicator 69. Therefore, even if the IC 81 and the ratio indicator 69 are provided between the connector CN1 and the main CPU 61, it is not difficult for the illegal member 180 to reach the main CPU 61.

  FIG. 64D shows an embodiment, in which the connector CN1, the ratio indicator 69, the ICs 81 and 82, and the main CPU 61 are arranged in this order from the connector CN1 side to the main CPU 61 side, and the ratio indicator 69 is connected from the main CPU 61 to the connector CN1. Is arranged at a position close to (for example, a distance within twice the height of the ratio indicator 69). In this case, in order for the illegal member 180 inserted from the connector opening CS1 to reach the main CPU 61, it is necessary to get over the ratio indicator 69 and the IC 81, and the ratio display having a height higher than that of a component having a low height is displayed. It is difficult for the illegal member 180 to get over the device 69, and since the low-height component is not mounted between the connector CN1 and the high-height ratio indicator 69, the illegal member 180 has a high height. It is not possible to utilize low profile components to overcome the ratio indicator 69. Further, by disposing the ratio indicator 69 at a position closer to the connector CN1 than the main CPU 61, the space available for the illegal member 180 inserted from the connector opening CS1 to get over the ratio indicator 69 is narrowed. It is difficult for 180 to get over the ratio indicator 69, and it becomes difficult for the illegal member 180 to reach the main CPU 61.

  In order to prevent the illegal member 180 from using an IC or the like having a height lower than that of the ratio indicator 69 in order to get over the ratio indicator 69, the ratio indicator 69 is connected to the main CPU 61 from the connector CN1. By arranging them at a close position and arranging parts such as an IC having a height lower than that of the ratio indicator 69 between the connector CN1 and the ratio indicator 69, but only between the ratio indicator 69 and the main CPU 61. However, it becomes difficult for the illegal member 180 to reach the main CPU 61.

  According to the positional relationship of the connector CN1, the main CPU 61, the ratio indicator 69, and the ICs 81 and 82 described with reference to FIG. By accommodating 69, it is possible to make a fraudulent act against the ratio indicator 69 difficult, and even if the fraudulent member 180 is inserted from the connector opening CS1 and the fraudulent act is performed on the main CPU 61, the ratio indicator 69 is This makes it difficult for the illegal member 180 to reach the main CPU 61 as a barrier, and it is possible to suppress illegal acts on the main CPU 61. Further, by mounting the ratio indicator 69 near the connector CN1, it is possible to confirm the display content of the ratio indicator 69 and the periphery of the connector, which is likely to be a target of fraud, all at once.

  Further, as described above with reference to FIG. 64 (a), by soldering the ratio indicator 69 only on the other surface 63B side of the main control board 63, the ratio indicator 69 faces the main control board 63. Even if it is specified that the predetermined amount (the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69 on the side opposite to the display surface of the ratio indicator 69 on which the 7-segment display is arranged) is separated from the soldered portion, It becomes possible to narrow the space between the direction surface 63A and the lower surface of the ratio display 69, and the main CPU 61 through the illegal member 180 through the gap between the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 and the lower surface of the ratio display 69. It becomes difficult to cheat on.

  Although the ratio indicator 69 is composed of four separate 7-segment displays, it may be composed of at least one display unit composed of a plurality of 7-segment displays. Good. For example, it may be configured by one display unit configured by uniting four 7-segment displays, or configured by two display units configured by uniting two 7-segment displays. In this case, since the gap between the 7-segment displays in the ratio indicator 69 is eliminated or the number of the gaps is reduced, it becomes difficult for the illegal action against the main CPU 61 through the illegal member 180 through the gap between the 7-segment displays. .

  Further, the ratio indicator 69 has a rectangular shape, and terminals of the ratio indicator 69 are provided on the side 69B1 of the ratio indicator 69 facing the connector CN1 and on the side 69B2 of the ratio indicator 69 facing the side 69B1. The ratio indicator 69 may be mounted on the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 so as to be arranged. In this case, the illegal member 180 is passed through the gap between the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 and the surface of the ratio indicator 69 facing the main control board 63 (the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69) to the main CPU 61. Even if an illegal act is attempted, the terminal of the ratio indicator 69 becomes a barrier and it becomes difficult to pass the illegal member 180 through the gap. Therefore, the illegal action on the main CPU 61 through the illegal member 180 is suppressed. can do.

  In addition, the main control board 63 is provided with a test mounting area for mounting electronic components during a test in order to output a test signal, and the ratio indicator 69 is mounted in an area close to the test mounting area. You may. The test attachment area is an area where electronic components are attached for sending and receiving signals to and from the test device, and even if a fraudulent act is performed on the electronic components attached to the test attachment area, the gaming machine is illegally activated. Do not connect directly. Therefore, when an illicit person commits an illicit act, it is necessary to bring an illicit member such as a wire to another electronic component that exceeds the attachment area during the test, and the portion of the illegitimate member that can be seen from the outside becomes large. Since it becomes easy to visually recognize the illegal member, it is possible to suppress the illegal act against the gaming machine.

  Further, the arrangement of components (connector, ratio indicator, main CPU, IC, etc.) mounted on the main control board 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

  By the way, the signals transmitted on the main control board 63 include, for example, set values (setting 1 to setting 6) for easily winning medals, gaming states (normal gaming state, special gaming state, etc.), winning, winning, medals. And a signal not directly related to any of the advantage of the game and the acquisition of the game medium, and a signal not directly related to neither the advantage of the game nor the acquisition of the game medium. The area surrounded by the dotted line in FIG. 65 includes a first terminal that handles a signal directly related to either the advantage of the game or the acquisition of the game medium as a terminal, and the advantage of the game and the acquisition of the game medium. May or may not include a second terminal that handles a signal that is not directly related to any of the above. Further, the area surrounded by the one-dot chain line does not include the first terminal which handles a signal directly related to either the advantage of the game or the acquisition of the game medium as a terminal, and the advantage of the game and the game medium A second terminal is included to handle signals that are not directly related to any of the acquisitions.

  Here, the first terminal and the fourth wiring that handle signals directly related to either the advantage of the game or the acquisition of the game medium are, for example, terminals and wiring related to the input of the signal to the main CPU 61, and the main CPU 61. It is a terminal and wiring relating to the output of the payout signal of the game medium (terminal and wiring related to the output of the signal from the main CPU 61 (payout control means 110) to the hopper unit 43 (hopper motor 57)). Further, the second terminal and the third wiring that handle signals that are not directly related to the advantage of the game and the acquisition of the game medium are, for example, left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M from the main CPU 61 (stop control means 106). , 13R driving-related parts (left, middle, right reel motors 14L, 14M, 14R) related to terminals and wiring for signal output, main CPU 61 (credit display control means 116) related to credit display ( Terminals and wiring for output of signal to credit indicator 45), or terminals and wiring for output of signal from main CPU 61 (cancellation control means 117) to parts (medal selector 48) related to cancellation of game medium Is. Note that the term "terminal" as used herein includes, in addition to component terminals, vias, through holes, and the like through which a cheating person can easily conduct electricity with a wire or the like. In addition, even for the same type of component, the terminal and the wiring of the component may be the first terminal and the fourth wiring, and may be the second terminal and the third wiring, depending on the signal to be handled. For example, an IC 81 described later enclosed by a one-dot chain line is an IC relating to the second terminal and the third wiring, and an IC 82 described later enclosed by a dotted line is an IC relating to the first terminal and the fourth wiring. It should be noted that the wiring that handles signals that are directly related to either the advantage of the game or the acquisition of the game medium and the wiring that handles signals that are not directly related to either the advantage of the game or the acquisition of the game medium include board wiring. Make it not exist.

  A ratio indicator 69 is mounted on one surface 63A of the main control board 63, as shown in FIG. The ratio indicator 69 is configured by a package such as DIP in which the terminal of the ratio indicator 69 is not provided in the central region of the opposite surface (the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69) facing the arrangement surface of the 7-segment display. ing. When such a ratio indicator 69 is mounted on the main control board 63, one surface 63A of the main control board 63 and a surface facing the one surface 63A of the ratio indicator 69 (a lower surface of the ratio indicator 69) are provided. There is a possibility that a gap will be created between the ICs and the IC may be illegally hidden and mounted in this clearance.

  Further, on one surface 63A of the main control board 63, connectors CN1 and CN2, ICs 81, 83, 84 and 85, a diode 91, resistor groups 92 and 94, and a transistor 93 are mounted around the ratio indicator 69. ing. The connectors CN1 and CN2, the ICs 81, 83, 84 and 85, the diode 91, the resistance groups 92 and 94, and the transistor 93 are provided with a second terminal, or the ratio indicator 69 is provided with a second terminal. Therefore, the first terminal is not arranged, or the first terminal is not arranged on the ratio indicator 69 side. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 65, between the first terminal of the connector CN2 in the area surrounded by the dotted line and the ratio display 69, the area of the area surrounded by the one-dot chain line on the ratio display 69 side of the connector CN2 is surrounded. The two terminals are arranged, the second terminal is arranged on the ratio display 69 side, and the connector CN2 in which the first terminal is not arranged is arranged on the ratio display 69 side.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 65, the IC 82 and the main CPU 61 are mounted on the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 so as to be adjacent to the IC 81 and be positioned between the self-component and the ratio indicator 69. Has been done. The IC 82 and the main CPU 61 are provided with a first terminal on the ratio indicator 69 side. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 65, the second terminal is arranged between each of the first terminal of the IC 82 and the first terminal of the main CPU 61 and the ratio indicator 69, and the first terminal is arranged. It means that there is no IC 81.

  Further, on one surface 63A of the main control board 63, as shown in FIG. A capacitor group 95 is mounted so as to be located. A first terminal is arranged in the capacitor group 95. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 65, the second terminal is disposed between the first terminal of the capacitor group 95 and the ratio indicator 69, and the resistor groups 92, 94 in which the first terminal is not disposed, This means that the transistor 93 is arranged.

  Further, on the one surface 63A of the main control board 63, as shown in FIG. 65, the connector CN2, the transistor 93, and the resistor group 94 are located adjacent to the connector CN2 and between the self-component and the ratio indicator 69. Thus, the connector CN3 is mounted. A first terminal is arranged on the connector CN3. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 65, between the first terminal of the connector CN3 and the ratio indicator 69, the second terminal is arranged and the resistor groups 92, 94 and the transistor 93 where the first terminal is not arranged are arranged. The second terminal is arranged on the ratio indicator 69 side, and the connector CN2 on which the first terminal is not arranged is arranged on the ratio indicator 69 side.

  According to the arrangement of FIG. 65 described above, there is a component in which the first terminal is not arranged between the first terminal and the ratio indicator 69 or the first terminal is not arranged on the ratio indicator 69 side. It is installed. Therefore, the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 and the ratio indicator 69, which corresponds to the gap immediately below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69 on the side opposite to the display surface of the ratio indicator 69 on which the 7-segment display is arranged. Even if the IC is illegally hidden and mounted in the gap between the surface facing the one surface 63A (the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69), the wiring extending from the illegally hidden IC mounted is connected to the first terminal. Avoid parts mounted between the first terminal and the ratio indicator 69 (parts where the first terminal is not arranged or where the ratio indicator 69 has no first terminal). It is necessary to lay wiring extending from the mounted IC that is illegally hidden. For example, in order to connect the wiring 185 extending from the mounted IC to the first terminal 82b of the IC 82, the wiring 185 should be avoided from the IC 81 mounted between the first terminal 82b and the ratio indicator 69. Need to be installed. For this reason, the wiring extending from the illegally hidden and mounted IC becomes long, and it becomes easy to find the illegally hidden IC.

  In order to connect the IC illegally hidden in the gap immediately below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69 to the first terminal of the region surrounded by the dotted line of the connector CN3, the first terminal is not provided on the ratio indicator 69 side. Is arranged, and it is necessary to avoid the connector CN2 in which the second terminal is arranged on the ratio indicator 69 side. As described above, even if the first terminal is arranged, the component arranged between the first terminal and the ratio indicator 69 is illegally hidden unless the first terminal is arranged on the ratio indicator 69 side. It can be treated as an effective component for finding the stored IC.

  Further, it is preferable that the ratio indicator 69 be surrounded by a component in which the first terminal is not arranged or the first terminal is not arranged on the ratio indicator 69 side. Alternatively, for all the first terminals, disposing a component in which the first terminal is not arranged between the first terminal and the ratio indicator 69 or in which the first terminal is not arranged on the ratio indicator 69 side. Is preferred. By the way, in the first terminal having a large distance from the ratio indicator 69, the linear distance between the first terminal and the IC illegally hidden in the gap immediately below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69 is long. Even if the wiring for connecting the IC and the illegally hidden IC is laid in a straight line, the wiring becomes long and the illegally hidden IC can be easily found. On the other hand, in the first terminal having a small distance from the ratio indicator 69, the linear distance between the first terminal and the IC illegally hidden in the gap immediately below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69 becomes short, If the wiring connecting the first terminal and the illegally hidden IC can be laid in a straight line, the wiring becomes short and it is difficult to find the illegally hidden IC. Therefore, among the plurality of first terminals, the first terminal is not arranged at least between the first terminal closest to the ratio indicator 69 and the ratio indicator 69, or on the ratio indicator 69 side. It suffices if a component in which the first terminal is not arranged is mounted.

  Next, laying of wiring on the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (a), a first wiring 161 for VDD and a second wiring 162 for GND are laid on one surface 63A of the main control board 63, and directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69. The second wiring 162 is not laid in the corresponding area 63C of the one surface of the main control board 63, which is opposed to the ratio indicator (simply referred to as “display (display component)” in FIG. 66) 69. Here, the first wiring 161 is a wiring for supplying VDD to the ratio indicator 69. In FIG. 66 (a), the first wiring 161 is laid in the facing area 63C, but both the first wiring 161 and the second wiring 162 may not be laid in the facing area 63C. The second wiring 162 may be laid on the 63C without laying the first wiring 161. Further, the first wiring may be for GND and the second wiring may be for VDD.

  FIG. 66B is an example different from that of the embodiment, in which both the first wiring 161 for VDD and the second wiring 162 for GND are provided directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69. It is laid on the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 so as to be laid on the facing region 63C of 63. In this case, the one surface 63A of the main control board 63, which corresponds to the gap immediately below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69, and the surface facing the one surface 63A of the ratio indicator 69 (the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69). When the illegal IC 191 which requires both VDD and GND for operation is mounted in the gap so as to be hidden, it is connected to the first wiring 161 and the second wiring 162 in order to supply VDD and GND to the illegal IC 191. Since the wiring 192A and the wiring 192B are completed within the facing region 63C of the main control board 63, which is located directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69, the unauthorized trace cannot be visually recognized from the outside.

  66C shows an embodiment, in which both the first wiring 161 for VDD and the second wiring 162 for GND are laid on the one surface 63A of the main control board 63, but the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69 is shown. The second wiring 162 is not laid in the facing region 63C of the main control board 63, which is located immediately below the above. In this case, the one surface 63A of the main control board 63, which corresponds to the gap immediately below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69, and the surface facing the one surface 63A of the ratio indicator 69 (the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69). When the illegal IC 191, which requires both VDD and GND for operation, is mounted in the gap so as to be hidden, the wiring 192A for connecting the illegal IC 191 and the first wiring 161 corresponds to the area directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69. The wiring 192B for connecting the illegal IC 191 and the second wiring 162 is directly under the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69, although it cannot be visually recognized from the outside because it is completed in the facing area 63C of the main control board 63. Since it cannot be completed in the facing area 63C of the main control board 63, a part of the wiring 192B is laid in an area that is easily visible from the outside without being obstructed by the ratio indicator 69. Therefore, even if the illegal IC 191 is mounted so as to be hidden in the gap between the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 and the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69, which corresponds to the gap immediately below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69, the illegal IC 191 is not Since a part of the wiring 192B for connecting to the wiring 162 can be easily visually recognized from the outside without being disturbed by the ratio indicator 69, the illegal IC 191 can be easily found.

  It should be noted that the second wiring 162 may not be laid in the peripheral area of the facing area 63C of the main control board 63, which corresponds to the area immediately below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69. According to this, a portion of the wiring 192B for connecting the illegal IC 191 to the second wiring 162 that can be visually recognized from the outside without being obstructed by the ratio display 69 becomes long, so that the portion directly below the lower surface of the ratio display 69 is provided. Discovery of the illegal IC 191 mounted so as to be hidden in the gap between the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 corresponding to the gap and the opposite surface (the lower surface of the ratio display 69) of the one face 63A of the ratio display 69. Will be easier.

  Subsequently, a modification related to the laying of the first wiring 161 and the second wiring 162 will be described with reference to FIG. 67. In this modification, a module configured by mounting a ratio indicator 69 corresponding to a display component on a substrate 70 and a driver for driving the ratio indicator 69 (in a “display unit including a display component (display unit)”) (Corresponding) is mounted on one surface 63A of the main control board 63. This board 70 is attached to a connector 79 mounted on one surface 63A of the main control board 63. Here, since there is the connector 79 directly below the substrate 70, there is no gap enough to illicitly hide an IC or the like. Therefore, even in the case of FIG. 67, the place where the IC or the like is illegally hidden is a gap directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69. Even when the terminals of the board 70 are fixed to the main control board 63 by double-sided soldering, the terminals of the board 70 are directly below the board 70, and there is a gap enough to illicitly hide an IC or the like. do not do. For this reason, the place where the IC or the like is hidden illegally is a gap directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the first wiring 161 and the second wiring 162 are laid on the one surface 63A of the main control board 63, and the first wiring 161 and the second wiring 162 drive the driver described above. Therefore, it is also laid in a region 63D of the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 which faces the board 70. By the way, the second wiring 162 is not laid in a region 70C of the surface 70A of the substrate 70 which faces the ratio indicator 69 and which faces the ratio indicator 69 (corresponding to immediately below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69). With this configuration, as in the case of FIG. 66, the facing surface 70A of the substrate 70 corresponding to the gap immediately below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69 and the facing surface of the substrate 70 of the ratio indicator 69 (the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69). It is possible to easily find an IC that is illegally hidden in the gap between The second wiring 162 is also not laid around the facing area 70C of the substrate 70, which corresponds to the area immediately below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69.

  Further, a modified example of laying wiring on the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a), the one side 63A of the main control board 63 on which the ratio indicator (simply referred to as “display (display component)” in FIG. 68) 69 and the like is mounted has One wiring 161, a second wiring 162 for GND, a third wiring 163 that handles a signal that is not directly related to any of a game advantage and a game medium acquisition, a game advantage and a game medium acquisition directly A fourth wiring 164 that handles related signals is laid. The first wiring 161 and / or the third wiring 163 or both of them are provided in a region 63C of the one surface 63A of the main control board 63, which is directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69 and faces the ratio indicator 69. Although laid, the second wiring 162 and the fourth wiring 164 are not laid in the facing region 63C. Further, it is preferable that the first wiring 161 and / or the third wiring 163 or both of them are laid in the facing area 63C according to a design rule in which the distance between the wirings is minimum in almost the entire area.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 68A, the second wiring 162 for GND is laid on the other surface (the surface on which the component is not mounted) 63B and the one surface (the component mounting surface) 63A on the main control board 63. It may have been done.

  According to the wiring arrangement described with reference to FIG. 68 (a), as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the ratio to the one surface 63A of the main control board 63, which corresponds to the gap immediately below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69, is set. When the illegal IC 191 which requires both VDD and GND for operation is mounted so as to be hidden in the gap between the surface facing the one surface 63A of the display 69 (the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69), the illegal IC 191 is The wiring 192A for connecting to the wiring 161 is laid in a region invisible from the outside, and the wiring 192B tries to connect to the second wiring 162 laid on the other surface 63B of the main control board 63 which is the shortest distance from the illegal IC 191. .. However, if a hole is made in the main control board 63 to connect to the second wiring 162 laid on the other surface 63B of the main control board 63, the main control board 63 is laid in the facing area 63C corresponding to directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69. Or disconnect the wiring (first wiring, third wiring) (193 in the figure) or short-circuit the second wiring 162 and the wiring (first wiring, third wiring) laid in the facing region 63C. Therefore, the slot machine will not operate normally. This makes it possible to understand that fraud is being made.

  In addition, in the gap between the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 and the facing surface (the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69) of the ratio indicator 69, which corresponds to the gap immediately below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69. When the illegal IC 191 is mounted so as to be hidden, the wiring 192C for connecting the illegal IC 191 to the fourth wiring 164 is completed within the facing region 63C of the main control board 63 corresponding to the area directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69. Since this is not possible, a part of the wiring 192C will be laid in a region that can be easily visually recognized from the outside without being obstructed by the ratio indicator 69. Therefore, even if the illegal IC 191 is mounted so as to be hidden in the gap between the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 and the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69, which corresponds to the gap immediately below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69, the illegal IC 191 is not included in the fourth area. Since a part of the illegal wiring for connecting to the wiring 164 can be easily visually recognized from the outside without being disturbed by the ratio display 69, the illegal IC 191 can be easily found, and the advantage of the game and the acquisition of the game medium can be achieved. It becomes possible to prevent fraud.

  64 and 66, the ratio indicator 69 may be replaced with a module (corresponding to a "display unit") configured by mounting a display component and a driver for driving the display component on the substrate 70. ..

  Further, in FIG. 68, the ratio indicator 69 may be replaced with a module (corresponding to a “display unit”) configured by mounting a display component and a driver for driving the display component on the substrate 70. In this case, the first wiring 161 and / or the third wiring 163 or both of them are laid directly below the lower surface of the display component among the surfaces of the substrate 70 facing the display component, but the second wiring 162 and the fourth wiring 163 are provided. The wiring 164 is not laid. Further, immediately below the lower surface of the display component among the surfaces of the substrate 70 facing the display component, the first wiring 161 or the third wiring 163 or the first wiring 161 or the third wiring 163 thereof is designed according to the design rule that the distance between the wirings is almost the entire area. It is preferable to lay both.

  Mounting the display device on the main control board includes mounting the display component directly on the main control board and mounting the display unit including the display component on the main control board. For example, when the ratio indicator 69 is mounted on the main control board 63, when the ratio indicator 69 is directly mounted on the main control board 63, the display unit having the driver and the ratio indicator 69 mounted on the board 70 is main-controlled. The case of mounting on the substrate 63 is included.

  The arrangement relationship of components (connector, ratio indicator, main CPU, IC, etc.) and wiring mounted on the main control board 63 described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 64 to 68 is a ball game machine. It can also be applied to (pachinko game machines). Here, as a signal directly related to either the advantage of the game or the acquisition of the game medium, for example, a gaming state (normal probability jackpot state, high probability jackpot (probability fluctuation) state, etc.), jackpot, game ball For example, reel driving in the case of a drum type is assumed to be associated with a signal that is not directly related to the advantage of a game or the acquisition of a game medium.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 provided with the display window 11 on the front surface where the reels can be visually recognized, a visual recognition preventing means is provided to prevent the ratio indicator 69 from being seen when the inside of the housing 3 is seen through the display window 11. May be. As the visual recognition preventing means, for example, the ratio indicator 69 is attached to the upper part of the support frame 13 (see FIG. 4) that supports the reels 13L, 13M, and 13R, and looks into the housing 3 through the display window 11. Provide a shield plate that is large enough to hide. According to this, since the display content of the ratio display 69 cannot be confirmed unless the front door 5 is opened, it is determined whether or not the display content of the ratio display 69 is an abnormal value by an illicit person. This can be prevented from being used to confirm whether or not the injustice is overlooked by the inspector, and the player can confirm the display content of the ratio display 69 to predict the set value or the like. Can be prevented.

  Further, a specifying means may be provided which allows the player to confirm the display contents when he or she confirms the ratio display 69 from the front, and prevents the confirmation of the display contents when the player confirms the ratio display 69 from the perspective. Examples of the specifying means include a polarizing film attached to the substrate case CS, a mesh formed on the substrate case CS, and a wall provided so as to cover the periphery of the ratio indicator 69. In this case, the wall provided so as to cover the periphery of the ratio indicator 69 is formed so as to project more toward the inside of the casing than the upper surface of the substrate case CS, so that the confirmation of the display content by the above-mentioned perspective is more effective. Can hinder. In addition, auxiliary means for assisting the confirmation of the display contents may be provided only when the player confirms the ratio indicator 69 in a front view. The auxiliary means is, for example, a magnifying lens provided only in a front view. Further, the ratio indicator 69 may be arranged at a position where the display of the ratio indicator 69 is difficult to see in perspective. For example, when the main control board 63 is mounted inside the housing 3 as shown in FIG. 4, the ratio indicator 69 is provided on the shaft side when the door is opened. According to these, even if the clerk opens the front door 5 in order to eliminate the cause of the error that occurred during the game, the player cannot easily confirm the display content of the ratio display 69, which is not intended. It is possible to prevent the player from confirming the display content of the ratio display 69.

  According to the above-described first embodiment, an advantageous zone counting flag for counting the number of advantageous zone games is provided separately from the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data, and the processing of setting the advantageous zone counting flag is performed by the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data. Regardless of the setting timing, after the rotation of all the reels 13L, 13M, 13R is stopped, and after the setting timing of all the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data in the game has passed, the next game is performed. This is performed after the game information totaling process of totaling various data until the bet number can be set. Thereby, at the time of counting the number of advantageous section games in the game in which the transition from the AT non-permissible state to the AT allowable state is determined, the content of the advantageous section count flag indicates that the game is in the AT allowable state (advantageous section). It is not counted as a game of, and the game for which the transition from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissible state is determined is not counted as a game in the AT permissible state (advantageous zone), and the number of advantageous zone games is accurately determined. Can be counted.

  Further, since the processing of setting the advantageous zone counting flag is performed by setting the advantageous zone lamp lighting control data set at the time of processing as the advantageous zone counting flag, it is necessary to set the advantageous zone counting flag. It is possible to suppress an increase in the data storage capacity of.

  According to this configuration, the start of the AT permissible transition determination effect and the start of lighting of the advantageous section lamp 47 are performed substantially at the same time. It is possible to prevent the resulting distrust of the player's AT allowable transition decision effect.

  Further, since the ratio indicator 69 is housed in the substrate case CS which is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace, the five types of game inspection information and the ratio indicator displayed on the ratio indicator 69 are displayed. It is possible to prevent tampering with the predetermined abnormality notification display by the device 69. In addition, a part of the ratio indicator 69 that can be lighted (in the present embodiment, a lightable part DP (dot part) of each of the ones digit, the tens digit, and the thousands digit) is used. 5 types of game inspection information are displayed in order, and a display for abnormality notification is performed using the above-mentioned part of the ratio display unit 69 that can be turned on. Therefore, the inspector can immediately confirm whether or not the five types of game inspection information include the abnormal state game inspection information, only by confirming the display content of the ratio display 69. For example, when the abnormality notification using the above-described part of the ratio display 69 that can be turned on is not made, the inspector indicates that all five types of game inspection information are displayed on the ratio display 69. It is possible to confirm that none of the five types of game inspection information is in an abnormal state by checking the above-mentioned part of the ratio display 69 where the lighting is possible without waiting, immediately after the start of the inspection. Further, when the abnormality notification is made using the above-mentioned part of the ratio indicator 69 which can be turned on, the inspector confirms the above-mentioned part of the ratio indicator 69 which can be turned on immediately after the start of the inspection. By doing so, it can be confirmed that at least one of the five types of game inspection information is in an abnormal state, and then the five types of game inspection information displayed at the other possible lighting positions of the ratio display 69 are displayed. By checking, it is possible to grasp the game inspection information that is in an abnormal state. In this way, the inspector can perform the inspection accurately and efficiently while preventing fraud.

  In addition, the ones dot portion (lightable portion DP) of the ratio indicator 69 is a predetermined abnormality notification when the game inspection information of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 of the five types of game inspection information is in an abnormal state. Used for display, the tens dot part of the ratio display 69 is the game inspection information of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 and the game inspection information of the ratio display numbers 0 to 2 of the five types of game inspection information. It is used for a predetermined abnormality notification display when at least one of them is in an abnormal state. Thereby, for example, when the game inspection information of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 is more important than the game inspection information of the ratio display numbers 0 to 2, the inspector determines the dot portion of the first place of the ratio display 69. By checking, it is possible to immediately determine whether or not the game inspection information of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 with high importance is in an abnormal state.

  Further, when the total number of games is less than 175,000, the tens place dot portion (lightable location DP) of the ratio indicator 69 lights up, so the inspector uses the total games used for calculating the advantageous zone ratio (cumulative). It is possible to immediately understand that the number is less than 175,000. If the total number of games is less than 175,000, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) obtained by using at least this total number of games may be in an abnormal state because the total population is small, and the inspector The inspection can be performed based on this.

  Further, by setting a value larger than the value set in the dot blinking timer in the ratio blinking timer, the blinking interval of the above-mentioned part of the lightable portions of the ratio indicator 69 is set in the ratio indicator 69. It becomes shorter than the blinking interval of other lightable parts except the part of the lightable parts. That is, the blinking speed of the above-mentioned part of the ratio display 69 which can be turned on is faster than the blinking speed of the other turnable parts of the ratio display 69 excluding the part of the turnable part. As a result, the above-mentioned part of the ratio display 69 that can be lighted is conspicuous, and the inspector can easily confirm the abnormal state at that part of the lightable part. Also, the blinking of some lightable points and the blinking of other lightable points are completely synchronized (both some lightable points and other lightable points are lit, and both are turned off) Therefore, it is possible to prevent the difficulty in confirming the display content of the ratio display 69.

  Further, according to Modifications 1 to 3 of FIGS. 15 and 63, when the RWM error occurs during the inspection, the RWM error is notified to the ratio indicator 69 that displays the inspection item such as the advantageous section ratio (total). Since the display for doing so is performed, the inspector can recognize the occurrence of the RWM error at an early stage.

  Further, since the ratio is displayed in the ratio segment of the ratio indicator 69, the inspector can easily determine whether or not an injustice is performed based on the value displayed in the ratio segment. Further, according to the first embodiment, the identification seg of the ratio indicator 69 has a predetermined total number of games (6000 for continuous character ratio (6000 games) and character ratio (6000 games), advantageous section ratio. (Cumulative), continuous character ratio (cumulative) and character ratio (cumulative) are displayed in blinking until reaching 175,000, and after reaching, lighted. Therefore, the inspector can easily recognize whether the display content of the ratio display 69 is before reaching the predetermined number or after the reaching. Further, the ratio segment of the ratio indicator 69 indicates the ratio of the advantageous section (cumulative), the ratio of continuous character parts (6000 games), the ratio of character parts (6000 games), the ratio of cumulative character parts (total), and the ratio of character parts (total). If the calculated value is greater than or equal to a predetermined ratio specified value (a value that is determined to be fraudulent, and if the ratio is greater than or equal to the prescribed value, then fraud is determined) The display is blinking, and if the ratio is less than the specified value, it is displayed lit. Therefore, the inspector can easily recognize whether the display content of the ratio indicator 69 is equal to or more than the predetermined ratio specified value, that is, whether the injustice is performed. Further, the inspector can easily recognize whether or not an illegal act is performed by blinking or lighting the ratio segment even if the inspector does not know the specified ratio value.

  When the dividend B is less than or equal to the divisor A, the ratio (percentage) of the dividend B to the divisor A (the result of multiplying the dividend B by 100 and multiplying by 100 (B × 100) by the divisor A) is the quotient. Is always 100 (decimal notation) or less, and it is focused on that the quotient can be represented by 7 bits, and only the lower 7 bits are calculated as the value of the quotient. Therefore, the calculation load of the ratio (percentage) of the dividend B to the divisor A is suppressed, and the calculation can be performed in a short time.

  When the dividend B is the divisor A or less, the ratio (percentage) of the dividend B to the divisor A can be calculated as follows. The dividend B is multiplied by 100, and the divisor A is subtracted from the result (B × 100) multiplied by 100 to determine whether the subtraction result (B × 100−A) is less than 0. When it is less than 0, the percentage is 0% or more and less than 1%. If it is 0 or more, the divisor A is subtracted from the subtraction result (B × 100−A), and it is determined whether the subtraction result (B × 100−2 × A) is less than 0. When it is less than 0, the percentage is 1% or more and less than 2%. When it is 0 or more, the divisor A is subtracted from the subtraction result (B × 100-2 × A), and it is determined whether the subtraction result (B × 100-3 × A) is less than 0. When it is less than 0, the percentage is 2% or more and less than 3%. By repeating this, the ratio (percentage) of the dividend B to the divisor A can be calculated. In this method, the subtraction process and the determination process are performed up to 100 times, and the calculation load can be suppressed to some extent. On the other hand, in the percentage calculation method of the first embodiment, since only the lower 7 bits are calculated as the quotient value, the calculation load can be further suppressed.

  Further, since the totalization by the totaling means 114a is performed after the determination by the symbol determination means (winning determination means) 109 and before the payout processing by the payout control means 110, an electric power is supplied during the medal payout processing. Even if a disconnection occurs and then the power is restored and initialization is performed, for example, even if the setting is changed abruptly during payout of medals, the aggregation process is already performed. For this reason, even if the power is cut off during the medal payout process and then the initialization is accompanied when the power is restored, for example, when the setting is changed unexpectedly during the medal payout. Also, the payout number of medals can be accurately counted.

  In addition, the information collected when the predetermined condition is satisfied (every 400 games in this embodiment) and the information that is totaled even when the predetermined condition is not satisfied (each game in this embodiment) are collected. Waste of processing can be eliminated. Further, by separating the calculation items that are calculated when the predetermined condition is satisfied (every 400 games in this embodiment) from the calculation items that are calculated even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied (each game in this embodiment). It is possible to eliminate waste of arithmetic processing, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific order related to the predetermined order of displaying the display items (1) to (5) on the ratio display 69 (the present embodiment). Then, a plurality of calculation items (in the present embodiment, effective section ratio (cumulative), continuous character ratio (6000 games), character ratio (6000 games), and continuous character ratio (cumulative) in the order opposite to the predetermined order. ), Each of the character ratio (cumulative)), and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied (each game in the present embodiment), the calculation item corresponding to the first order in the predetermined order (in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment). , The effective section ratio (cumulative) is calculated, the calculation can be performed efficiently.

  Further, after the RWM error is detected, when the setting is changed, the stop of the game is released, and the ratio display 69 is controlled by the normal display using the normal lighting mode. As a result of the normal display control using the normal lighting mode of the ratio indicator 69, it is possible to recognize early that the stop of the game has been released.

  Further, since the gap Gp is provided between the four 7-segment displays Sd arranged side by side on the one surface 63A side of the main control board 63, one of the main control boards 63 is provided via the gap Gp between the adjacent 7-segment displays Sd. The direction 63A side can be seen through, and it is illegal to hide between the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 and the surface facing the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 of the 7-segment display Sd provided with the gap Gp. Even if an illegal component Wc such as an IC is mounted, the illegal component Wc can be easily found by visual recognition from the outside.

  Further, by arranging the connection terminals T of each 7-segment display Sd on the side surface on the side of the gap Gp (see FIG. 6), the connection terminals T of the 7-segment display Sd interfere with each other and the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 is provided. It becomes impossible to mount an illegal part Wc such as an illegal IC between the above and one surface of the ratio indicator 69 composed of four 7-segment displays Sd facing the one surface 63A. It can be surely prevented.

<Second Embodiment>
The second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 69, the same reference numerals as those used in FIGS. 1 to 68 relating to the above-described first embodiment indicate the same or corresponding ones. In the following, points different from the first embodiment will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the four 7-segment displays Sd constituting the ratio indicator 69 are not arranged side by side in an aligned state as shown in FIG. 6, but as shown in FIG. 69, between the adjacent 7-segment displays Sd. This is different from the first embodiment in that the four 7-segment displays Sd are arranged side by side in a staggered manner in the parallel direction on the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 so that the gap Gp of does not widen.

  According to the second embodiment, the hidden space (one-dot chain line in FIG. 69) P between the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 and the surface of each 7-segment display Sd facing the one surface 63A is incorrect. When the component is mounted, the size of the hidden space P becomes smaller than the vertical or horizontal dimension of the unauthorized component. Therefore, even if the unauthorized component is placed in the hidden space P, part of the unauthorized component is hidden. It is easy to find out the illegal part because it becomes easy to protrude from the space P, that is, a part of the illegal part protrudes from the area directly under the 7-segment display Sd and becomes easily visible from the outside. it can. Further, when the connection terminals of each 7-segment display Sd are provided on the side surface except the gap Gp side, the size of the hidden space P is physically smaller than the vertical or horizontal size of the illegal component, and thus physically. Unauthorized parts cannot be placed in the hidden space P.

<Third Embodiment>
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 70, the same reference numerals as those used in FIGS. 1 to 68 relating to the above-described first embodiment indicate the same or corresponding ones. In the following, points different from the first embodiment will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the first point is that a transparent cover that covers all of the 7-segment displays Sd forming the ratio indicator 69 is provided as a blocking member that blocks the insertion of foreign matter into the gap Gp between the adjacent 7-segment displays Sd. Different from the embodiment.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70, when the ratio indicator 69 is composed of two 2-digit 7-segment displays Sda, a gap Gp is provided between the two 7-segment displays Sda. Both 7-segment displays Sda are installed in parallel on one surface 63A of the control board 63, and a transparent cover Cv shown by a chain double-dashed line in FIG. 70 is provided so as to cover all the two 7-segment displays Sda. In addition, T in FIG. 70 is a connection terminal of the 7-segment display Sda.

  Further, a transparent cover Cv for covering all of the four 7-segment displays Sd shown in FIG. 6 in the first embodiment may be provided, and as shown in FIG. 69, four 7-segments arranged in a staggered manner alternately. A transparent cover Cv may be provided so as to cover the entire display Sd. Further, it is preferable that the convex lens processing is performed on the upper position of the gap Gp of the transparent cover Cv or the transparent substrate case CS. In this case, the gap Gp can be enlarged and visually recognized through the convex lens processed portion. Even if an illegal component is mounted between the one surface 63A of the control board 63 and the opposing surface on the side of the 7-segment display Sd provided with the gap Gp, the illegal component can be easily found.

  According to the third embodiment, even if an attempt is made to insert a foreign substance such as a wire, which is an illegal member, into the gap Gp between the adjacent 7-segment displays Sda for the purpose of performing an illegal act, the transparent cover Cv, which is the blocking member, is used. It is possible to prevent foreign matter from being inserted into the gap Gp and prevent fraudulent activity.

  The transparent cover Cv as the blocking member does not need to cover the entire side surface and the entire upper surface of the ratio indicator 69 including the two 7-segment displays Sda, and at least shields the side surface where foreign matter is easily inserted into the gap Gp. However, when the blocking member shields the side surface, it does not need to be transparent. In short, the blocking member only needs to have a configuration capable of blocking the insertion of foreign matter into the gap Gp.

<Fourth Embodiment>
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 71, the same reference numerals as those used in FIGS. 1 to 68 relating to the above-described first embodiment indicate the same or corresponding ones. In the following, points different from the first embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 71 is a view of the other surface 63B side opposite to the one surface 63A of the main control board 63. The wiring pattern provided on the other surface 63B side of the main control board 63 and the ratio indicator 69 are configured. 7 shows a state in which the connection terminals T of the four 7-segment displays Sd are soldered. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. The difference from the first embodiment is that a cover K that covers a plurality of circles in 71 is provided.

  According to the fourth embodiment, the wire connection pattern on the other surface 63B side of the main control board 63 and the solder connection portion H between the connection terminals T of the four 7-segment displays Sd are externally wire-operated for unauthorized purposes. Even if an attempt is made to access it by an unauthorized member such as, the solder K cannot be accessed by the cover K, and an unauthorized act can be prevented in advance. Even if the ratio indicator 69 is composed of two 7-segment displays for two-digit display as shown in FIG. 70, the solder between the connection terminals and the wiring pattern of the two 7-segment displays is used. A cover may be provided to cover the connecting portion.

<Fifth Embodiment>
A fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 72, the same reference numerals as those used in FIGS. 1 to 68 relating to the above-described first embodiment indicate the same or corresponding ones. In the following, points different from the first embodiment will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the four 7-segment displays Sd constituting the ratio indicator 69 are not arranged side by side in one row but are arranged in two rows of two, and the seven-segment displays Sd that are vertically and horizontally adjacent to each other are arranged. The difference from the first embodiment is that a gap Gp is provided therebetween.

  According to the fifth embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the above-described first embodiment. Note that, as shown in FIG. 72, the four 7-segment displays Sd are not limited to be arranged in twos in twos, and the seven-segment displays Sd arranged in the vertical direction and / or the horizontal direction may be arranged in the main control board 63. It may be arranged parallel to the one surface 63A and shifted in a direction in which the gap Gp is not widened. Further, in order to prevent foreign matter from being inserted into each gap Gp between the four 7-segment displays Sd arranged as shown in FIG. 72, a blocking member similar to the transparent cover Cv as shown in FIG. 70 is provided. It may be provided, and a solder connection portion between the connection terminals of the four 7-segment displays Sd and the wiring pattern on the other surface 63B side of the main control board 63 is provided by a cover similar to the cover K as in the fourth embodiment. You may cover it.

  In the case where four 7-segment displays Sd are arranged and a total of four gaps Gp are provided between vertically and horizontally adjacent 7-segment displays Sd as shown in FIG. The connection terminal of the 7-segment display Sd is arranged only on the side of the gap Gp forming the line, or the connection terminal of the 7-segment display Sd is arranged on the side of the gap Gp forming the cross-shaped horizontal line formed by the four gaps Gp. However, the connection terminal may be arranged so as to interfere with an illegal part arranged below the 7-segment display Sd so that the illegal part cannot be arranged. Further, the connection terminals of each 7-segment display Sd may be arranged on the different gaps Gp side. In this case, one of the connection terminals of the 7-segment display Sd interferes with the 7-segment display Sd. It becomes impossible to place illegal parts below the.

<Sixth Embodiment>
A sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. Note that the sixth embodiment is an example in which the game machine of the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine that is a ball game machine, and the basic electrical configuration and operation are almost the same as those of the above-described first embodiment. However, in the following, the points different from the above-described first embodiment will be described.

  In the case of a pachinko gaming machine, unlike the slot machine 1 described above, the predetermined counting standard and the setting counting standard are expressed by the number of prize balls of the ball or the game time (play) time. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 73 in the present embodiment. In addition, the point that the number of prize balls is used as the predetermined aggregation standard or the set aggregation standard is significantly different from the first embodiment.

  The game information storage means 653 in the present embodiment is configured by an area set in advance in the RWM 65, and the predetermined number of prize balls as a predetermined counting standard is 6000, and the number of set prize balls M as a setting counting standard is 60,000, The data shown in FIG. 73 is stored.

  As shown in FIG. 73, a 2-byte storage area for storing the number of prize balls for 6000 prize balls in each period from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10 in the game information storage means 653 (FIG. 73). (Corresponding to the number of prize balls from P1 to P10), and a 3-byte storage area for storing the cumulative value of the number of prize balls for 6000 prize balls in each period from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10 ( 73 bytes (corresponding to the cumulative number of award balls in PS in FIG. 73), a 4-byte storage area for storing the total number of award balls after installation or after clearing the RWM (corresponding to the total number of award balls in FIG. 73) ) Has been formed. Here, the number of prize balls is the number of game balls paid out.

  As shown in FIG. 73, in the game information storage means 653, a 2-byte storage area for storing the number of character prize balls for the number of 6000 prize balls in each period from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10 ( (Corresponding to the number of character prize balls from P1 to P10 in FIG. 73), for storing the cumulative value of the number of character prize balls corresponding to the number of 6000 prize balls in each period from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10. A storage area of 3 bytes (corresponding to the number of accessory prize balls of cumulative PS in FIG. 73), and a storage area of 4 bytes for storing the total cumulative number of accessory prize balls after installation or after clearing the RWM (FIG. 73). Corresponding to the total number of award balls in total) has been formed. Here, the number of prize balls is the sum of the number of balls paid out for winning the ordinary electric auditors, the number of balls paid out for winning the special electric auditors A, and the number of balls paid out for winning the special electric auditors B. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 73, the game information storage means 653 is a 2-byte storage for storing the number of special electric auditor prize balls for 6000 prize balls in each period from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10. Area (corresponding to the number of special electric prize balls of P1 to P10 in FIG. 73), the accumulation of the number of special electric prize balls of 6000 prize balls in each period from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10 A storage area of 3 bytes for storing the value (corresponding to the number of special electric prize balls of cumulative PS in FIG. 73), and a total cumulative total of special electric prize balls after installation or after RWM clear. A 4-byte storage area (corresponding to the total cumulative number of special electric accessory prize balls in FIG. 73) is formed. Here, the number of special electric prize winning balls is the sum of the number of payout balls for winning the special electric winning effect A and the number of paying balls for winning the special electric winning effect B.

  As shown in FIG. 73, in the game information storage means 653, the character ratio in the latest 60,000 prize balls (the percentage of the cumulative PS character prize balls in FIG. 73 relative to the cumulative PS prize balls: 1-byte storage area (corresponding to the character ratio of cumulative PS in FIG. 73) for storing the ratio (60,000 award balls), and the character ratio in the cumulative number of award balls (in FIG. 73). Percentage of total cumulative number of prize balls relative to total cumulative number of prize balls: referred to as "character ratio (total)". 1-byte storage area (total cumulative role in FIG. 73). Corresponding to the material ratio) is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 73, in the game information storage means 653, the ratio of the special electric auditors product in the latest 60,000 prize balls (percentage of the cumulative PS special electric auditors prize ball number in FIG. 73 relative to the cumulative PS prize balls). : 1-byte storage area (corresponding to the special electric accessory ratio of cumulative PS in FIG. 73) for storing the “special electric accessory ratio (60000 prize balls)”, in the cumulative prize balls 73. For storing the special electric accessory role ratio (the percentage of the total cumulative number of special electric prize balls in FIG. 73 to the total cumulative number of prize balls: referred to as "special electric role ratio (total)"). A 1-byte storage area (corresponding to the total cumulative special electric auditors product ratio in FIG. 73) is formed.

  Note that the size of each storage area is not limited to the above, and can be changed as appropriate.

  However, regarding the number of prize balls, the number of prize prize balls, and the number of special electric prize prize balls, the storage area for storing the first period P1 to the tenth period P10 has a ring buffer structure. 1st period P1 to 10th period P10, such as 2nd period P2, 3rd period P3, ..., 9th period P9, 10th period P10, 1st period P1, 2nd period P2 ,. The ring pointer is updated every 6000 award balls while repeating sequentially, and the value of the period corresponding to the updated ring pointer is cleared and then updated for each award ball as needed. Further, regarding the number of prize balls, the number of prize prize balls, and the number of special electric prize prize balls, the cumulative PS and the total accumulation are updated every 6000 prize balls.

  The character ratio (60000 prize balls), the special electric character ratio (60000 prize balls), the character ratio (cumulative), and the special electric character ratio (total) are calculated for each 6000 prize balls.

  In addition, the number of prize balls, the number of prize prize balls, and the number of special electric prize prize balls described above correspond to the total items, and the ratio of prizes (60,000 prize balls), the ratio of special electric prize (60000 prize balls). , Ratio of accessories (cumulative), and ratio of special electric accessory (cumulative) correspond to the calculation items.

  The cumulative PS and the total cumulative number of prize balls, the number of prize balls, and the number of special electric prize balls are totaled (for each 6000 prize balls in this embodiment) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Is. The number of prize balls, the number of prize prize balls, and the number of special electric prize prize balls in each period from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10 are not satisfied even when predetermined conditions are satisfied (in the present embodiment, each prize is awarded). Sphere) This is the information to be aggregated. Although the predetermined condition is satisfied for each 6000 award balls in the present embodiment, the condition is not limited to this.

  The character ratio (60000 prize balls), the special electric character ratio (60000 prize balls), the character ratio (cumulative), and the special electric character ratio (cumulative) are calculation items as described above. It is displayed on a ratio display (corresponding to "display means") 69 in a predetermined order. In the present embodiment, the predetermined order is as follows: the first is the ratio of special electric auditors (60,000 prize balls), the second is the ratio of characters (60,000 prize balls), and the third is the ratio of special electric auditors (cumulative). ) The fourth is the character ratio (total).

  The character ratio (60,000 prize balls), the special electric character ratio (60000 prize balls), the character ratio (cumulative), and the special electric character ratio (cumulative) are set when a predetermined condition is satisfied (the book). In the embodiment, the calculation item is calculated for each 6000 prize balls. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (every 6000 award balls in this embodiment), a character role ratio (60,000 award balls), a special electric character role ratio (60000 award balls), and a character ratio (total). ), And the special electric auditors product ratio (cumulative) are in a specific order related to the predetermined order displayed on the ratio display 69 (in the present embodiment, the reverse of the predetermined order displayed on the ratio display 69). Order). In the present embodiment, the predetermined condition is satisfied for each 60000 prize balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. Further, although the specific order is the reverse of the predetermined order, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specific order is the same as the predetermined order displayed on the ratio display 69. Good.

  Subsequently, a totaling process of totaling the storage contents of the game information storage unit 653 shown in FIG. 73 performed by the totalizing unit 114a in the present embodiment will be described.

  The totaling unit 114a is required for each prize ball for the values of the number of prize balls, the number of prize balls, and the number of special electric prize balls for the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10. The number of prize balls, the number of prize prize balls, and the value of the special electric prize prize balls in the corresponding period are updated by adding the prize balls according to.

  Then, the totaling unit 114a calculates the cumulative number of prize balls from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10 for each 6000 award balls and stores the accumulated value in the cumulative PS number of prize balls. Calculate the cumulative number of character prize balls from P1 to P10 in the 10th period and store the cumulative value in the number of character prize balls in cumulative PS. Special electric character prize from P1 to P10 in the 1st period The cumulative number of balls is calculated, and the cumulative value is stored in the special PS prize ball number of cumulative PS. The totaling means 114a adds the total number of prize balls for each 6000 award ball by adding the number of award balls in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10 to the total number of award balls. By updating the number of prize balls and adding the number of character prize balls in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10 to the total number of character prize balls, the total number of character prizes By updating the number of balls and adding the number of special electric accessory prize balls in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10 to the total number of special electric role prize balls, The number of special electric accessory prize balls is updated.

  The aggregating means 114a updates the stored content of the game information storage means 653 performed for each 6000 award balls after the number of award balls after the previous update of the ring pointer reaches 6000, and then updates the ring pointer, The values of the number of prize balls, the number of prize prize balls, and the number of special electric prize prize balls corresponding to the updated ring pointer from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10 are cleared to 0. The ring pointer is updated as in the first period P1, the second period P2, the third period P3, ..., The ninth period P9, the tenth period P10, the first period P1, the second period P2 ,. The first period P1 to the tenth period P10 are sequentially repeated.

  Subsequently, the arithmetic processing performed by the arithmetic means 114b in the present embodiment based on the stored contents of FIG. 73 will be described.

  The calculating means 114b of FIG. 7 is based on the stored contents of FIG. 73, and is based on the stored contents of FIG. 73. The object ratio (cumulative) is calculated for each number of 6000 prize balls.

  In the calculation of the character ratio (60,000 prize balls), the ratio (percentage) (%) of the cumulative PS character prize balls to the cumulative PS prize balls is calculated, and the special electric character ratio (60000 prize balls) is calculated. In the calculation of the number, the ratio (percentage) (%) of the cumulative PS special electric prize prize ball number to the cumulative PS prize ball number is calculated. Further, in the calculation of the character ratio (cumulative), the ratio (percentage) (%) of the total number of character prize balls to the total cumulative number of prize balls is calculated, and the special electric character ratio (total) is calculated. Then, the ratio (percentage) (%) of the total cumulative number of special electric prize balls to the total cumulative number of prize balls is calculated. Note that the same method as the ratio calculation described in the first embodiment is used to calculate each ratio in the sixth embodiment.

  Subsequently, the display control means 115 in the present embodiment controls the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 to perform normal display control using the normal lighting mode and special display control using the special lighting mode based on FIG. I do.

  In the normal display control using the normal lighting mode, the display control unit 115 has a part of all the possible lighting positions of the ratio indicator 69 that can be turned on (in the present embodiment, the thousands and tenths of the ratio indicator 69). The predetermined game inspection information of the four types of game inspection information is displayed by using the other lightable portions except the respective lightable portions DP (dot portions) of the 1st digit and the 1st digit, and for a certain period of time. By sequentially changing the display object of the ratio display 69 to another game inspection information of the four kinds of game inspection information for each, the four kinds of game inspection information can be displayed on the ratio display device 69 in the other possible lighting positions. Use to display regularly. Then, the display control unit 115 displays at least one of the four types of game inspection information during the display control of the four types of game inspection information using the other lightable portions of the ratio indicator 69. In the case of an abnormal state, a predetermined abnormality notification display is performed using the above-mentioned part of the ratio indicator 69 where the lighting is possible. However, in the present embodiment, the game inspection information includes the inspection data (for example, the special electric auditors product ratio (cumulative)) obtained by the calculation unit 114b and the information for identifying the inspection data.

  First, with reference to FIG. 74, the display contents of the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 related to the game inspection information under the normal display control will be described. However, the display content of the 7-segment display column in FIG. 74 is a specific display example of the ratio indicator 69, and the percentage (%) is 50 (%) and none of the four types of game inspection information is in an abnormal state. This is the case.

  On the ratio display 69, as the display items of the game inspection information, (1) Special electric auditors product ratio (60,000 prize balls), (2) Character ratio (60000 prize balls), (3) Special electric auditors product There are ratios (cumulative) and (4) accessory ratios (cumulative), and these can be turned on at the tens place, the tens place and the ones place DP of the ratio indicator 69 according to the display method shown in FIG. It is displayed using other possible lighting points except the dot part). However, the ratio display numbers in FIG. 74 indicate the display order.

  Specifically, in (1) Special electric role product ratio (60,000 prize balls), the segment of the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) of the ratio display 69 indicates "Special electric role product ratio (60000 prize). The abbreviation "6b" indicating "number of balls)" is displayed, and the special electric accessory prize number of balls in the last 60,000 number of prize balls (Fig. 73) is displayed in the lowest two digits (the tens digit and the ones digit) of the ratio indicator 69. The cumulative PS special electric prize prize ball number of is the effective number 2 digits of the ratio (percentage) (%) to the prize ball number (cumulative PS prize ball number of FIG. 73) in the latest 60,000 prize balls. It

  In addition, in the case of (2) character ratio (60,000 prize balls), an abbreviation that indicates the "character ratio (60,000 prize balls)" in the segment of the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) of the ratio indicator 69. “7b” is displayed, and the number of character prize balls in the last 60,000 prize balls is displayed in the lower two digits (the tens digit and the ones digit) of the ratio display 69 (the number of character prize balls of cumulative PS in FIG. 73). ) Is displayed as a two-digit effective numerical value of a ratio (percentage) (%) with respect to the number of prize balls (number of prize balls of cumulative PS in FIG. 73) in the latest 60,000 prize balls.

  Furthermore, in (3) Special electric auditors product ratio (cumulative), the abbreviation “6c” indicating “special electric auditors product ratio (cumulative)” is displayed in the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) of the ratio indicator 69. Is displayed, and the number of special electric prize balls in the total number of prize balls in the lower two digits (the tens digit and the ones digit) of the ratio display 69 (the total accumulated special electric prize balls in FIG. 73) is displayed. The effective numerical value 2 digits of the ratio (percentage) (%) of the number) to the number of prize balls in the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls in FIG. 73) is displayed.

  Furthermore, in (4) character ratio (cumulative), the abbreviation "7c" indicating "character ratio (cumulative)" is displayed in the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) of the ratio indicator 69. , The cumulative number of prize balls in the lowest two digits (the tens digit and the ones digit) of the ratio display 69 in the cumulative number of prize balls (the total cumulative number of prize balls in FIG. 73) A two-digit effective numerical value of the ratio (percentage) (%) with respect to the number of prize balls (total number of prize balls in FIG. 73) in is displayed.

  However, when the percentage is 100 (%), it is not possible to display in the lower two digits (the tens digit and the ones digit) of the ratio indicator 69. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is different from the first embodiment. Similarly, 99 (%) is displayed in the lower two digits (the tens digit and the ones digit) of the ratio display 69.

  However, (1) Special electric auditors role ratio (60,000 prize balls), (2) Role ratio (60000 prize balls), (3) Special electric auditors ratio (cumulative), (4) Role ratio (cumulative) ), As shown in the 7-segment display column of FIG. 74, the 100th possible lighting portion DP is turned on. When the gaming inspection information is not in an abnormal state, the boundary between the identification segment and the ratio segment is easily grasped by turning on the lightable portion DP of the hundreds.

  (1) Special electric auditors role ratio (60,000 prize balls), (2) Roles ratio (60,000 prize balls), (3) Special electric auditors ratio (cumulative), (4) Role ratio (cumulative) ) Are displayed in a predetermined order. Specifically, (1) the special electric auditors product ratio (the number of 60000 prize balls) is displayed for a certain period. Subsequently, (2) the character ratio (60,000 prize balls) is displayed for a certain period. Further subsequently, (3) Special electric auditors product ratio (cumulative) is displayed for a certain period. Further, subsequently, (4) the accessory ratio (cumulative) is displayed for a certain period.

  Then, the game inspection information of these display items (1) to (4) is sequentially and repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. At this time, when the predetermined number of prize balls corresponding to each is not reached, the segment of the upper two digits is displayed in blinking, and when each ratio is equal to or more than the predetermined ratio specified value corresponding to each, The lower two digits of the segment are displayed blinking.

  However, when the power is turned off and then turned on again, regardless of the display item when the power is turned off, the display is made from (1) the ratio of the special electric auditors product (60,000 prize balls). For example, if the power is turned off while (2) the character role ratio (60000 prize balls) is displayed, (1) the special electric character ratio (60000 prize balls) is displayed. To be done.

  Note that the abbreviations are merely examples, and the abbreviations are not limited to those shown in FIG. 74, as long as the display items are different from each other.

  Next, the display contents of the ratio indicator 69 related to the above-mentioned predetermined abnormality notification display during normal display control will be described.

  If the number of prize balls does not reach a predetermined value as the abnormal state of the four types of game inspection information, the ratio calculated by the calculation means 114b (in the present embodiment, the special electric auditors ratio (60000 prize balls) ), Character ratio (60,000 prize balls), special electric character ratio (cumulative), character ratio (cumulative)) may be greater than or equal to the specified ratio value.

  When at least one of the ratio display numbers 2 (special electric auditors' product ratio (cumulative)) and 3 (characteristics ratio (cumulative)) is equal to or higher than the ratio regulation value, the first place where the ratio indicator 69 can be turned on. DP (dot portion) blinks. Further, the ratio display numbers 0 (special electric auditors role ratio (60,000 award balls)), 1 (account ratio (60000 awards balls)), 2 (special electric auditors ratio (cumulative)), 3 (account ratio) If at least one ratio (cumulative) is equal to or greater than the specified ratio value, the tens digit DP (dot portion) of the ratio indicator 69 blinks. When the number of prize balls does not reach the predetermined value, the lit place DP (dot portion) of the thousands display of the ratio indicator 69 blinks. However, for example, as in the first embodiment, the blinking intervals of the lightable portions DP (dot portions) of the unit indicator, the tens place, and the thousands place of the ratio indicator 69 are the same as those of the ratio indicator 69. , The lit place and the tens place are set to be shorter than the blinking intervals when the game inspection information is blinked and displayed, except for the lightable portions DP.

  When the RWM error occurs, the display method shown in FIG. 15 is used.

  In the sixth embodiment, the sensor detects passage of a specific point of a bullet, and the totalizing unit 114a performs a totaling process based on the detection of the ball passing the specific point by the sensor, and the payout control unit. The ball pay-out process is performed based on the fact that the sensor detects a ball that has passed a specific point. The counting by the counting unit 114a is performed after the ball that has passed a specific location is detected by the sensor and before the payout process by the payout control unit 110. Thereby, the counting by the counting means 114a is performed after the ball that has passed through the specific portion is detected by the sensor and before the payout processing by the payout control means 110. Even if the power is cut off in the middle of the payout process and then the initialization is accompanied when the power is restored, the tallying process is already performed. For this reason, even if the power is cut off during the process of delivering the ball and the power is then restored and initialization is performed, the number of delivered balls and the like can be accurately counted.

  In addition, the same effects as those of the first embodiment can be obtained in the sixth embodiment.

  In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the number of prize balls is used as the predetermined totalization standard or the set totalization standard, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be the number of shot balls, for example.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and various modifications other than those described above can be made without departing from the spirit of the invention.

  In the above-described first to sixth embodiments, the blinking intervals of the lightable portions DP of the ones, tens and thousands of the ratio indicator 69 used for the notification display of the predetermined abnormal state are as follows. The ratio indicator 69 used for displaying the game inspection information is set to be shorter than the blinking interval of the other lightable points except the lightable points DP of the ones, tens and thousands, but is not limited to this. For example, the following may be used instead. It is also possible to constantly turn on the lightable portion DP corresponding to the content of the abnormal state among the lightable portions DP of the ones, tens and thousands of the ratio indicator 69. In this case, for example, steps S53 and S56 of FIG. 19 may be deleted, steps S657 to S659 of FIG. 42 may be deleted, and steps S784 and S785 of FIG. 48 may be deleted.

  The game inspection information described in the above-described first to sixth embodiments is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. Further, the content of the abnormal state is also an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  In the above-described first embodiment, when the ratios of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 are in an abnormal state, the lightable portions DP of the tens digit and the ones digit of the ratio indicator 69 are blinkingly displayed, and the second embodiment described above is performed. In the form, when the ratios of the ratio display numbers 2 and 3 are in an abnormal state, the lit place DP of each of the tens place and the ones place of the ratio indicator 69 blinks, but is not limited to this. Not something. For example, when the ratios of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 of the first embodiment are in an abnormal state, the one-digit possible lighting portion DP of the ratio display 69 is blinkingly displayed, and the ratio display numbers 2 and 3 of the sixth embodiment are displayed. When the ratio is abnormal, the first possible lighting portion DP of the ratio display 69 may blink.

  In the above-described first to sixth embodiments, in the blinking control for the game inspection information, until the number of games or the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined value, the lit place of the thousands and hundreds of the ratio display 69 is displayed. Of these, the lit place except the lit place DP (dot part) is blinked, and when the ratio such as the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is equal to or higher than the specified ratio, the tens and ones of the ratio indicator 69. Although the lightable portions other than the lightable portions DP (dot portions) of the tens digit and the ones digit are flickered, the lightable portions at the positions of 10 and 1 are not limited to this. For example, when there is some abnormality in the game inspection information, the game inspection information is turned on in the ratio display unit 69 except for the lightable points DP (dot portions) in the tens place, the tens place and the ones place. May be displayed by blinking. Also in this case, as in the first and second embodiments, the blinking intervals of the lightable portions DP (dot portions) of the thousandth place, the tens place and the ones place of the ratio indicator 69 are the same as those of the ratio indicator 69. It may be set to be shorter than the blinking interval of the other lightable portions except the lightable portions DP of the thousandth place, the tens place and the ones place.

  In the above-described first to sixth embodiments, the lightable points A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP of the ratio indicator 69 may be configured by full-color LEDs, and the color and The abnormality may be notified by changing the brightness. For example, a display color for abnormality notification is determined in advance for each ratio display number, and an abnormality notification display is made using a color corresponding to the ratio display number whose ratio is abnormal.

  In the above-described first to sixth embodiments, only one threshold value for the ratio used for abnormality notification is provided for each ratio display number, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a threshold value of a plurality of levels may be set. It may be provided. In this case, it is preferable to make the display of the abnormality notification different in each stage. For example, the display mode may be changed by changing the blinking speed, or the display mode may be changed between blinking and lighting. And so on.

  In the above-described first to sixth embodiments, the abnormal state is informed in the same display mode at each of the plurality of lightable points for informing the abnormal state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of this, for example, the type of inspection data in an abnormal state may be notified by changing the display mode at one lightable location. For example, in the 1st place where the light can be turned on (dot portion), the continuous character ratio (cumulative) corresponding to the ratio display number 3 is abnormal when blinking at intervals of 0.1 seconds, and the ratio is blinking at intervals of 0.5 seconds. For example, the accessory ratio (cumulative) corresponding to the display number 4 is abnormal, and both the continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) and the accessory ratio (cumulative) are abnormal due to lighting.

  In the above-described first to sixth embodiments, after power is turned on, display item (1), display item (2), display item (3), display item (4), display item (5), display item (1). The display control is performed so that the display is switched in the order of display items (2), ... In a certain display period, but the display control is not limited to this. For example, the display item in an abnormal state is turned on. The display may be controlled to be displayed preferentially based on the time and the detection of the door opening, and the display period of the display item in the abnormal state becomes longer than the display period of the display item in the abnormal state. As described above, the display item switching timing may be controlled.

  In the above-described embodiment and modified examples, when the RWM error occurs, all of the lightable portions of the ratio indicator 69 are lit up. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to turn on all of the lightable portions of the ratio display 69 for a predetermined time at the time of transition or at the time of confirming the settings. In this case, it is possible to inspect whether or not a portion related to the lightable portion of the ratio indicator 69, including the lightable portion, is out of order.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a plurality of tabulation items and a plurality of calculation items have been described, but a modification may be made to use a part of the plurality of tabulation items and a plurality of calculation items described in each embodiment. Alternatively, all or some of the plurality of tabulation items or the plurality of calculation items described in each embodiment may be modified so as to add another tabulation item or multiple calculation item. Further, the specific numerical values such as the predetermined totaling standard and the set totaling standard mentioned in each embodiment are examples, and the present invention is not limited to these and can be appropriately changed.

  Further, in the above-described first embodiment, since the game in which the transition from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissible state is determined is not counted as the game in the AT permissible state, that is, the game of the advantageous section, the game information totaling process of FIG. 26. Then, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section count flag is on, and when it is on, a process of adding 1 to the number of advantageous section games is performed. However, not to count the game that has decided to shift from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissible state as a game in the AT permissible state is from the operation of the start switch 19 until the lottery process is performed, or the relevant game. In the setting timing of the advantageous zone lighting control data of the advantageous zone lamp 47 in which a plurality of timings exist, the earliest timing (timing before S205 in FIG. 23) (hereinafter, referred to as “first setting timing”). In the period up to), if the advantageous section lamp lighting control data is on (content indicating that the advantageous section lamp 47 is lit), 1 is added to the number of advantageous section games and off (content indicating that the advantageous section lamp 47 is turned off) This can also be realized by not adding 1 to the advantageous-zone game number (not updating the advantageous-zone game number) (this method is referred to as "another method 1").

  In another method 1, if the total number of paid-out medals other than the number of advantageous zone games is totaled until the start switch 19 is operated until the lottery process is performed, or until the first setting timing, the total number of paid-out coins The total number of payouts, etc., will be calculated from the operation of the start switch 19 of the next game until the lottery process is performed, or during the period up to the first setting timing, and the actual total payout number and the like at the end of the game. The consistency with the number of sheets will not be achieved. In another method 1, the number of advantageous zone games is totaled until the lottery process is performed from the operation of the start switch 19 or until the first setting timing, and the total number of payouts excluding the number of advantageous zone games is paid out. If the totaling is performed after the symbol determining process, the counting process is performed at a plurality of timings, and the number of command statements relating to the counting process increases, which increases the program capacity. In another method 1, if the number of advantageous zone games and the total number of games are totaled from the operation of the start switch 19 to the time when the lottery process is performed, or during the period up to the first setting timing, the electric power is supplied during the game. Even games that have not ended normally due to disconnection are counted as the number of advantageous zone games and the total number of games.

  Since the problem of the alternative method 1 does not occur in the method described in the first embodiment, it can be said that the method of the first embodiment is superior to the alternative method 1. However, even in the other method 1, it is possible to achieve the purpose of not counting the game for which the transition from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissible state is determined as the game in the AT permissive state, that is, the game in the advantageous section.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the slot machine 1 and the pachinko gaming machine have been described as examples of the gaming machine of the present invention, but the present invention is applied to a gaming machine called a parrot, which is a combination of the slot machine and the pachinko gaming machine. May be applied, and when the present invention is applied to such a game machine, a pachinko ball as a game medium may be adopted. Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention may be applied to a video game by executing a computer program.

  Further, instead of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R in the above-described first embodiment, an image display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT is used, and a plurality of symbols are sequentially displayed on the image display device. You may comprise. Further, the number of rotating reels may be two or more rows, and may be appropriately set to an optimal number according to the mode of the game.

  Further, the data stored in the game information storage means 653 of FIG. 7 can be read out from the main control board 63 by performing a specific process. Further, the game information stored in the game information storage means 653 of FIG. 7 can be confirmed from the outside with a display device such as the credit display 45 or the liquid crystal display 27. Further, the RWM 65 of FIGS. 3 and 7 has a structure in which data is retained without being erased even when the power of the housing 3 is turned off. Further, the data stored in the game information storage means 653 of FIG. 7 has a structure in which the data is not erased by an external operation. Further, based on the data stored in the game information storage means 653 of FIG. 7, when it is determined that there is a high possibility that an illegal act is being performed, the game is stopped or the payout is restricted. Is also possible.

  The above contents may be combined as appropriate.

  Then, display means having a plurality of variable display rows for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, start operation means for the player to perform variable display of all the variable display rows, and the player performs the variable display. Stop operation means for performing an operation for stopping the variable display of each row, and an informing lamp for informing that a special game is allowed to allow a special game to be able to specify an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means. It is possible to widely apply the present invention to a gaming machine which is provided with a control means for controlling the progress of the game and is capable of playing the game by setting the bet number.

1 ... Slot machine 13L, 13M, 13R ... Reel 19 ... Start switch 21L, 21M, 21R ... Start switch 47 ... Advantageous section lamp 61 ... Main CPU
100b ... Game state setting means 114a ... Aggregation means 118 ... Payout display control means

Claims (3)

Display means having a plurality of variable display rows for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, start operation means for a player to perform variable display of all the variable display rows, and a player for each of the variable display rows Stop operation means for performing an operation for stopping the variable display of, a notification lamp for notifying that it is in a special game permissive state that allows a special game to be able to specify an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means, In a gaming machine having a control means for controlling the progress of the game and capable of playing the game by setting the bet number,
The control means is
When the game being executed is in a special game non-permissible state in which the special game is not permitted, a lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to win a plurality of winning combination groups including a plurality of specific winning groups, and the plurality of specific winning combinations. The group includes a first specific role group and a second specific role group,
When the game being executed is the special game nonpermissive conditions, performs determination processing for determining whether to shift to the special game permissive in response to the winning of the plurality of specific combination group, the special game allowing state When it is decided to shift to, the gaming state of the gaming machine is controlled so that the game is played in the special gaming allowable state from the next game,
On the condition that the transition from the special game non-permissible state to the special game permissible state is determined , the notification lamp is turned on and off at a lighting setting process timing according to the specific winning group that triggered the determination process . The lighting control data used for control is set to the content indicating the lighting of the notification lamp corresponding to the special game permissive state, and the condition for ending the special game permissible state is satisfied , at the turn-off setting processing timing, Set the lighting control data to the content indicating that the notification lamp is turned off corresponding to the special game non-permissible state,
When the count flag indicating whether or not to count as a game in the special game permissive state indicates counting, the game is counted as a game in the special game permissive state and indicates that the count flag does not count. If it is, do not count the game as a game in the special game allowed state, perform the counting process,
The count flag is set to a content indicating counting when the next game is a game in the special game permissive state, and set to content indicating not counting when the next game is not a game in the special game permissive state. Process
The lighting setting process timing according to the first specific combination group is a timing before the counting process, and the lighting process of the notification lamp is performed at a timing before the counting process according to the lighting setting process timing. ,
The lighting setting process timing according to the second specific winning group is the timing after the counting process, and the lighting process of the notification lamp is performed at the timing after the counting process according to the lighting setting process timing. ,
The process of setting the counting flag, regardless of the timing of setting the lighting control data in the game, there later of the counting process, and, all of the lighting setting processing timing and the off setting processing timing in the game even after the have elapsed, have rows until it is possible to bet number setting for performing next game,
In the process of setting the counting flag, when the lighting control data set at the time of processing has the content indicating the lighting of the notification lamp, the counting flag is set to the content indicating counting, and the notification lamp is set. The game machine is characterized in that, when the content indicates that the light is turned off, the content is set to the content indicating that the counting flag is not counted .   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the processing of setting the counting flag is performed by setting the lighting control data set at the time of processing as the counting flag. When the lighting control data is set to the content indicating the lighting of the notification lamp before the variable display of all the variable display columns is stopped, the special game non-permissible state before the variable display of all the variable display columns is stopped. The game machine according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that a decision effect indicating that the transition from the special game permitted state to the special game permitted state has been decided.

Images